Home

IP Office Basic Edition - PARTNER Mode Phone Admin

1. On 9500 Series phones these options are accessed by pressing More and select Pause Stop or Recall as iors e Adding a at the start of a speed dial will indicate that speed dial as being a marked system speed dial When used marked system speed dials override dialing restrictions The is not dialed as part of the number If a is required to be dialed at the start of the marked system speed dial number enter e Exit programming by pressing ace PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 137 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At a system administration extension the first two extensions on the system press A Feature user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension from which you are programming 3 Select a speed dial by pressing Feature and dialing four digits between 0600 to 0699 If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display 3 To enter a number dial the digits For example to program 555 4757 press 5554757 Any existing number is overwritten To remove any digits press Hold Function Press to insert Character Description Pause Soft Key 1 Inserts a 1 5 second pause Soft Key 2 O R
2. e Display Language 14 amp Select the language for menus and messages displayed on the extension e Call Waiting 15 Enable call waiting tones for a single line extension e Intercom Dial Tone 15 gt Select the dial tone presented to the extension for calls e External Hotline 154 Set the extension to automatically dial an external number when it goes off hook e Internal Hotline 15 Set the extension to automatically dial another extension when it goes off hook e Outside Conference Denial 158 Control how many external parties are allowed in conferences e Do Not Disturb Exceptions 16h Set which numbers internal and external can still call the extension even when they have do not disturb enabled Other Options e Button Programming 220 Assign functions to any buttons not used for intercom call appearances and line appearances e Fax Machine Extension 13 Indicate which extension is a fax machine e Loudspeaker Extension 134 Indicate which extension is connected to a loudspeaker device e Doorphone Extension 12 Indicate which extensions are connected to doorphone devices and which other extensions should be alerted when the doorphone goes off hook e Allow Remote Call Forwarding 10 Set whether an extension can use forward calls to external numbers IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 144 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Extensio
3. e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Night Service Grp Ext When highlighted press Select At the Extension prompt enter the extension number whose group membership you want to change Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 2 3 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 504 The phone displays NS Group Ext 4 Enter 1 o
4. IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition Page 54 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Telephony Features Key System or PBX System 2 1 1 Outgoing Call Routing Key System Mode Each phone is configured with 2 Intercom buttons which cannot be changed It is also configured with line appearance buttons for specific lines using the Number of Lines settings and individual button programming Internal calls are made by selecting one of the two Intercom buttons provided on each phone and then dialing the number of another extension or of the system feature required External calls are made by selecting one of the line appearance buttons programmed on the phone and then dialing the external number required If the user dials without selecting an Intercom or Line button first the user s automatic line selection setting is used to determine which button if available gets used PBX System Mode Each phone is configured with 3 call appearance buttons 2 only on ETR phones These can be used to make both internal and external calls The dialing of an external call can be indicated by the dialing starting with a specific prefix 9 or 0 if required otherwise any number not matching an internal extension or function is assumed to be external The line used for an outgoing external call is determined by configuration settings ARS Selectors are created which can be groups of lines or specific functions usi
5. Power to the system can now be switched off ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 ui A U N At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 729 At the Shutdown Save All prompt press Enter 204 When the system has completely shutdown the phone display will be blank The LED 1s on the front of the phone system will fast flash red Power to the system can now be switched off IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 308 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance System Shutdown 17 10 System Upgrade In order to upgrade the software being used by the phone system the maintainer may provide the new software on an SD card This process can be used to copy that software to the SD card used by the system This process copies the software files in the system primary folder on an SD card inserted into the system s Optional SD card slot to the same folder on the SD card in the system s System SD card slot The system will then be restarted using those files e WARNING This process will restart the phone system and disconnect all currently connected calls e This process takes approximately 10 minutes or more and should not be interrupted once started e This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure
6. e DID Mapping For PRI and T1 trunks if the incoming call matches a configured DID and or ICLID number the Coverage Destination setting for the DID ICLID match is used rather than the line s Coverage Destination DID mapping cannot be done through the phone based administration menus e SIP Call by Call Table For SIP trunks if the incoming call matches a configured URI it is presented to the extension or group specified in the SIP line s Call by Call Table SIP call control cannot be done through the phone based administration menus e Night Service Group 27 Switching on night service changes the alerting for some lines and the delayed auto attendant coverage VMS Schedule operation PBX System Mode Incoming call routing in PBX System mode is similar to that in Key System mode except for the following e Calling Groups 18 These additional 4 groups are available as a destination for calls They can be selected as the destination in the Coverage Destination selection of trunks and in DID Mapping SIP Call by Call tables e Operator Group 19 This additional group is available as a destination for calls in DID Mapping and SIP Call by Call settings In PBX mode this group is the default Coverage Destination and is shown in Line Coverage Extension as the value 75 If coverage to the Operator Group is not desired assign an extension to the line coverage extension or assign the line to the hunt group using group call distribution Get
7. e The Call Waiting tone is not repeated e Call waiting is only supported for single line telephone extensions Do not assign Call Waiting to extensions that have fax machines credit card scanners modems or auto attendants because the call waiting tone interrupts the data connection e You cannot transfer either party connected by call waiting conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active e Transfer return group call distribution and hunt group calls are not considered incoming calls for this feature 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Waiting When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 not active ie no call waiting e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assi
8. Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 10 Caller ID Inspect This function allows the user to see the caller ID of a call on another line without interrupting the current call to which they are connected e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 17 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 0 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press i Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure ra e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administr
9. The following settings affect system operation These functions should typically only be performed when a system is first installed e System Mode 65 This setting is used to switch the system between key system mode and PBX system mode e System Numbering 665 Set whether the system should use 2 digit or 3 digit extension numbering e System Locale 67 gt Set the locale country that the system is installed in This value adjusts a range of hidden trunks settings and the default system language e System Language 6 Set the default language for all extensions The display language 14 amp for individual extensions can be changed IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 64 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Changes 3 1 System Mode The system can operate in either key system mode or PBX system mode 5 The default mode that the system adopts depends on the type of System SD card fitted to the system Systems with a PARTNER Norstar or IP Office U Law card default to key system mode Systems with an IP Office A Law card default to PBX system mode Key Mode vs PBX Mode Quick Summary PBX Mode The first 2 programmable buttons are used as The first 3 programmable buttons 2 on ETR phones intercom buttons are used as call appearance buttons Internal calls are made and answered using the Internal calls are made and answered using the call intercom buttons appear
10. Volume lt Process gt lt Item gt lt Data gt IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition Page 32 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview BST Phones 1 5 6 M7310N This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Line buttons based on the Number of Lines 73 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system are assigned from buttons 09 downwards and then button 10 upwards e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 33 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Administration Mode Buttons The diagram below indicates the button functions during phone based administration processes Sas 1 2 4 5 7 8 Ee o Volume HD U SK1 SK2 Process Item Data R
11. arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auxiliary Equipment When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Doorphone Alert Ext When highlighted press Select 5 Enter the extension number for which you want to adjust alert settings 6 Select the doorphone alert setting for that extension by dialing 1 to 4 Value Setting No alert This is the default setting Doorphone 1 alert extension 3 Doorphone 2 alert extension ca Doorphone 1 and 2 alert extension e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 606 The phone displays DoorPhnAlert 4 Enter the first alert system extension number 5 Enter the required value Value Setting No alert This is the default setting Doorphone 1 alert extension a Doorphone 2 alert extension 4 Doorphone 1 an
12. e Removing the wake up service button from the extension does not remove any existing wake up service alarms that have been set How the Wake Up Service Operates Using the button the first extension in the system can set a wake up call by specifying the target extension and the time e When the scheduled time is reach the system will make an intercom call to the target extension The call is indicated as a Wake Up Call in the display The wake up call will alert for approximately 30 seconds e Wake up calls ignore settings such as Do Not Disturb forwarding call coverage and coverage to voicemail e If the extension user is on a call e For an analog extension the wake up call is treated as unanswered e For other extensions the wake up call will alert with just an abbreviated ring e When a user answers a wake up call they hear music on hold if available otherwise they hear silence e Once a wake up call is answered it is treated as being completed and no further call attempts are made e If the wake up call is not answered or the extension is busy the wake up call is rescheduled for 5 minutes later e Only 2 attempts are made to send a wakeup call If neither is answered the wake up call is cleared e If a wake up call is already scheduled for an extension setting up a new wake up call to that extension will erase the existing wakeup call e Wake up calls are shown in the SMDR output with the name Wake Up Call 1408 1416 9504 950
13. Message Alert For IP Office Release 7 0 a button set to this function F938 Notification 26 allows a user to see the current state of other user s message waiting lamps It can only be used in conjunction with other users for which this user has Auto Dial Intercom 230 buttons configured Night Service Button 274 A night service button is used to switch night service on 503 off Pickup Group 273 This function allows the user to answer a call being Intercom 1 lt 661 presented to any extension that is a member of the pickup 664 gt group 18 configured for the button Privacy 275 This function allows the user to turn privacy on or off F83 FO7 When on other extensions are not able to bridge into the user s calls Recall 27 This function allows the user to send a recall or hook flash rey signal Save Number Redial 274 This function allows the user to save the number dialed during a call and to redial that number when idle This can be used when the number dialed does not answer Simultaneous Page 28h This function allows the user to save the number dialed during a call and to redial that number when idle This can be used when the number dialed does not answer Station Lock 285 This function allows the user to lock their extension from being used to make calls After they press the button they are prompted to enter a four digit code after which the extension is locked If the extension is already l
14. Send a hook switch flash signal Stop Soft Key 3 Stop dialing e Adding a at the start of a speed dial will indicate that speed dial as being a marked system speed dial When used marked system speed dials override dialing restrictions The is not dialed as part of the number If a is required to be dialed at the start of the marked system speed dial number enter 5 To save the number press Feature e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either of the system administration telephones on the first two extensions in the system press Feature 0 0 2 Select a speed dial by pressing Feature and dialing three digits between 600 to 699 e If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display e If no number is assigned to the code the word Blank is shown on the telephone display 4 To enter a number dial the digits For example to program 555 4757 press 5554757 Any existing number is overwritten Function Press to insert Character Description Pause HOLD P _IInserts a 1 5 second pause e On 9500 Series phones these options are accessed by pressing More and select Pause Stop or Recall as required e Adding a at the start of a speed dial will indicate that speed dial as being a marked system speed dial When used marked system speed dials override dialing
15. e Calling Groups 18h 71 to 74 A group of extensions that can be called at the same time e Hunt Groups 183 771 to 776 A group of extensions that the incoming call hunts through for the first extension available to answer e Night Service Group 185 A group of extensions that will ring immediately regardless of normal Line Ringing settings when night service is switched on e Pickup Groups 18 661 to 664 A group of extensions that can answer any call ringing within the group by dialing the Pickup Group code e Operator Group 19 This group is the default destination for incoming calls for systems running in PBX system mode Other Options e Group Call Distribution 8 Assign outside lines to hunt group Doing this allows outside calls to ring directly into a hunt group instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 180 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Groups 13 1 Calling Groups A calling group is one where the idle extensions in the group are alerted all at the same time when a call is directed to the group The system can have up to four calling groups using the group numbers 71 to 74 Any user in the system can ring or page a calling group or transfer a call to a calling group All idle extensions in the group are alerted and the first extension to answer the call is connected to the caller A typical use of
16. e Distinctive Ringing 19 Use different ringing patterns for different call types e Line Ringing 20h Set what ringing should be used by a line appearance on an extension The options are immediate ring delayed ring or no ring e Personalized Station Ringing 208 Use this feature to assign a personalized ring pattern to an extension e Line Ringing Pattern 20 The ring pattern used for calls being presented via a particular line can be specified e Override Line Ringing 208 Individual users can be configured to override Line Ringing Pattern settings e Ring on Transfer 20 Used to specify if callers hear ringing as they are being transferred e Transfer Return Rings 20 Define how long transferred calls should ring before returning to the transferring extension Other Options e VMS Coverage Rings 175 Set the number of rings before a call at an extension goes to voicemail e Hold Recall Time 214 Set how long calls remain on hold before recalling to the extension that put the call on hold IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 194 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings 14 1 Abbreviated Ringing When you are on a call and abbreviated ringing is active any incoming call rings only once The LED LCD next to the line button flashes until the call is answered or the caller hangs up This feature prevents incoming calls from distracting you when
17. e Exit programming by pressing aSa PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 119 The phone displays Ring on Transfer 4 Press the appropriate digit to change the value The default is 1 ie ringing is used while transferring the call e 1 e 2 Active Assigned the default Not active Not assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 119 The phone displays Ringing on Transfer 4 Press the appropriate digit to change the value The default is 1 ie ringing is used while transferring the call e 1 e 2 Active Assigned the default Not active Not assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change
18. o 01 Volume Mute e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Line buttons based on the Number of Lines 735 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system are assigned from buttons 07 downwards and then button 08 upwards e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 29 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 5 4 M7208N This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone from another extension Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Line buttons based on the Number of Lines 73 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system are assigned from buttons 07 downwards and then button 08 upwards e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Ph
19. 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 127 The phone displays Hold Timer 4 Press the appropriate digit to change the value The default is 5 60 seconds O Not Active 2 20 seconds 4 45 seconds 6 1 10 seconds 3 30 seconds 5 60 seconds 7 90 seconds 8 150 seconds 120 seconds 9 180 seconds e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 216 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Holding Calls Hold Recall Time IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 217 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 15 2 Music on Hold When music on hold is activated and available a caller on hold hears the hold music connected to the system 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administr
20. 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 937 4 The button function is changed to Station Unlock e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 285 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the E
21. Account Code Entry 12 22 This function allows the user to turn privacy on or off When on other extensions are not able to bridge into the user s calls This function allows the user to redirect all their calls to another number Extensions with Remote Call Forwarding 10 enabled can also forward calls externally by specifying a personal speed dial 13 as the destination This function allows the user to enter an account code prior to making a call or during a call 4 986 This function allows the user to transfer their current call to an extension s mailbox After pressing the button the current call is put on hold and the user can then enter the target extension number to indicate the mailbox required Voice Mailbox Transfer 28 VMS Cover 287 This function allows the user to switch use of voicemail coverage for their extension on or off This function allows the user to swap the display of caller ID name and number information on their extension Caller ID Name Display 24 Caller ID Inspect 240 N This function allows the user to see the caller ID of a call on another line without interrupting the current call to which they are connected This function allows the user to switch call coverage for their extension on or off The button settings include the extension number of the extension providing coverage When on calls to the user that ring unanswered for the user s number of coverage rings 19
22. Administration Mode Buttons The diagram below indicates the button functions during phone based administration processes lt Process gt IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 36 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 5 8 M7324N Overview BST Phones This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons N A e o wi oN o Volume SK1i OQU 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 11 10 09 08 12 13 14 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Mute e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Line buttons based on the Number of Lines 73 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system are assigned from buttons 23 downwards and then button 24 upwards e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office B
23. Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 731 The phone displays System Upgrade 4 Press Enter to start the upgrade The phone will display Upgrade In Progress 5 If the upgrade is not successful the display will indicate the probably cause e Shutdown and Insert Card There is no SD card in either the Optional SD or the System SD card slot e Upgrade Failed Try Again This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the upgrade or the card has become corrupted e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested 6 If the upgrade is successful the system will be restarted e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 309 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 731 The phone displays System Upgrade 4 Press Enter 20 g
24. IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Items with a are not accessible by code Items labeled DS can only be accessed using DS phones 1 Items labeled PBX can only be accessed on systems running in PBX system mode Items labeled Key can only be accessed on systems running in key system mode Items labeled Reboot require the system to restart ending any calls currently in progress IP Office Basic Edition Page 9 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 2 Programmable Buttons Most of the supported phones have programmable buttons to which functions can be assigned For some phones additional programmable buttons can also be added by attaching a button module or modules to the phone The order and numbering of the programmable buttons depends on the phone type The following sections contain details for each phone However the same type of buttons exist for all phones types are follows e Intercom Call Appearance Buttons The first programmable buttons are used by the system as follows The function is automatically assigned by the system and cannot be overridden e For systems running in key system mode the first two buttons 01 and 02 are used as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons These are used for making internal calls External calls are made using line appearance buttons e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are used as call appearance buttons T
25. Intercom 2 means the second intercom or call appearance button Function Description BST Other Absent Message 22 This function allows the user to set or clear an absent F931 message for display on their phone When set the absent message is also displayed on other extensions when they call the user Account Code Entry 226 This function allows the user to enter an account code prior F900 to making a call or during a call Active Line Pickup 228 This function allows the user to answer a call on a Intercom 1 68 particular line It can be used if the call is ringing held or already answered by another extension Auto Dial Intercom 230 This function allows the user to make a call to another Intercom 1 lt Extn gt specified extension The button lamp will also indicate when that other extension is in use Auto Dial Other 23 gt This function allows the user to make a call using a number Intercom 2 stored by the button The number can be an internal lt number gt number an external number an account code or any other number The button can then be used when a number of that type needs to be dialed Call Coverage 234 This function allows the user to switch call coverage for their extension on or off The button settings include the extension number of the extension providing coverage When on calls to the user that ring unanswered for the user s number of coverage rings 19 then also start ringing at the call cover
26. Send a hook switch flash signal Stop conFeRreNcE e On 9500 Series phones these options are accessed by pressing More and select Pause Stop or Recall as required Stop dialing 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 154 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Extension Settings External Hotline M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 311 4 At the Extension prompt enter the extension 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter the external number and press Enter Press Remove to remove any existing number The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Soft Key 1 Inserts a 1 5 second pause Soft Key 2 O R Send a hook switch flash signal Stop Soft Key 3 Stop dialing e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR
27. and marked system speed dial numbers 13 When a user dials a number that is on a disallowed list they hear an intercept tone fast busy signal after dialing the part of the number that is stored in the list To restrict dialing specific telephone numbers enter the telephone number exactly as you would dial it For example to prevent calls to the local number 555 5678 enter 5555678 To restrict dialing numbers in an entire area code enter that area code exactly as you would dial it for example 900 1900 or 0900 depending on the Toll Call Prefix required This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or a 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls To prevent dialing all telephone numbers in one exchange when a toll prefix is required Restriction Prevents local calls Prevents direct dial calls to the specified exchange in all area codes Prevents operator assisted calls to the specified exchange in all area codes Prevents direct dial toll calls in the same area code This is needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code Prevents operator assisted toll calls in the same area code This is needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code To prevent dialing all telephone numbers in one exchange when no toll prefix is required Entry Restriction Prevents local calls 207976 Prevents calls to area codes with 0 as the sec
28. e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 124 The display will show System Manual Backup 4 Press Enter to start the backup The display will show Backup in Progress 5 If the backup was successful the telephone display will show the message Backup Successful 6 If a backup fails the telephone display will give the reason why the backup was unsuccessful e Shutdown and Insert Card No card was detected in the phone system s System SD card slot For correct operation of the phone system the Avaya SD card should always be present at all times e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested e Backup Failed This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the backup or the card has become corrupted e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 300 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance Backup the Configuration ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first interco
29. eneeeneennn 265 16 23 Loudspeaker Page 267 16 24 Message Alert Notification 269 16 25 Night Senica n s rei iieiaei aaas 271 16 26 PICKUP GOUD i saia hiana hai oasi 273 16 27 Privacy isis ci todien tei iia ia ani 275 16 28 ReCalll siaine atea io iati 277 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition 16 29 Saved Number Redial ccccccccccececeseeeeeeseeeeeeees 279 16 30 Simultaneous Page 281 16 31 Station LOCK 00 00 nanii aa 283 16 32 Station UNIOCK cccccccesssesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeenee 285 16 33 VMS COVED ccscsssscssccececereneneeesesesssesesssssesses 287 16 34 Voice Mailbox Transfer cccccccccccececeseeeeeeeeseeeeee 289 16 35 Wake Up Service eee ceeeceeeeeeeeenneeeeeneeenneeeee 291 17 System Maintenance 17 1 Copy Extension Settings 0 eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 295 17 2 Remote Administration Password 296 17 3 Clearing a Backup Alarm 299 17 4 Backup the Configuration 300 17 5 Restore the Configuration 302 17 6 System Copy siiig iieii e e 304 17 7 System Detault 2 5c c scec tesccedids ebedeccdanbeteesdceadegeeceete 306 17 8 System RESCH cieszceccegzccees sends ecvsawbet peneceeeteeeeeeecareiss 307 17 9 System SHUtdOWN eee eeeeteeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeneeeenneeeen 308 17 10 System Upgrade ce eeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeteeeeeneeeneeeeees 309 17 11 Memory Card Startup Shutdown seee 311 17 12 Display System Details
30. not offer accented characters e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button Centralized Programming is shown on the display b Program Extension is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 3 Enter the extension name e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cursor will move onto the next space ay wsneoe 4 ashi EA ES 3defDEF 6mnoMNO 2 En a Ea Se eww e wyw o a T lt gt e Do not use punctuation characters such as _and in the name Start the name with an alphabetic character Note that the name is case sensitive and must be unique Non English languages do not offer accented characters e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basi
31. press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 208 The phone displays Line Coverage Extension At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 At the Extension prompt enter the covering extension for the line e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 208 The phone displays Line Coverage Extension At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 At the Extension prompt enter the covering extension for the line Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 77 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 4 4 Assign Line to Auto Attendant IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher and higher supports mult
32. press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 602 The phone displays Music on Hold 4 Enter the required value The default is 1 ie music on hold is on e 1 Active Assigned the default e 2 Not active Not assigned e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 218 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 16 Button Programming IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 219 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 Button Programming Most of the supported phones have programmable buttons to which functions can be assigned For some phones additional programmable buttons can also be added by attaching a button module or modules to the phone The order and numbering of the programmable buttons depends on the phone type The following sections contain details for each phone However the same type of buttons exist for all phones types are follows e Intercom Call Appearance Buttons The first programmable buttons are used by the system as follows The function is automatically assigned by the system and cannot be overridden e For systems running in key system mode the first two buttons 01 and
33. then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 93 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 5 4 Automatic Daylight Savings Time This feature automatically updates the system clock for annual daylight savings time changes This feature is only supported in North American locales 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Network Time Synch When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Press either 1 to display Active the default setting or 2 to display Not Active e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing ace PHONE Alternatively use the Back bu
34. 02 are used as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons These are used for making internal calls External calls are made using line appearance buttons e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are used as call appearance buttons These are used for making internal and external calls Line appearance buttons can still be used if required e Line Buttons These buttons used as line appearance buttons for external phone lines into the system These can only be programmed by a system administrator using the Number of Lines 734 and Line Assignment 795 functions They cannot be overridden by the extension user e Other Buttons Any additional buttons can be used for range of functions listed in Button Programming Functions 22h These buttons can be programmed by the system administrator and for some functions the extension user IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 220 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming 16 1 Button Programming Functions e Some functions are unique ie if already assigned to a button assigning the function to another button will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e Some functions are only supported on buttons that include LEDs LCD to indicate status If programmed onto a button without LEDs LCD the function may not work e Intercom 1 means the first intercom or call appearance button
35. 1 54 MT 208Ne coscccoasesepleshe alee cient n e ia 30 15 5 M7310 icine a ae ares 31 W556 MESA ONG EERE EE 33 KST IMI S24 ro ccsescectscites uatedeqotzet nitessien i ciaeeeuescbnadeteieed 35 1 5 8 M7324N inei Sed ieee arias 37 1 5 9 KLM Module eee ceesceeecteeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeas 39 We ONT FOO kresen ee eiei 40 TTA EF AOO ees cet nkicenticttea i 41 165 127 7208s csccdeeetsieelete ies oteecde eii ier etedes 42 WSEAS TGA Or 2 eee 2a8 vet ta tee cca Meh e aaa aie 43 NSE TAT PO AGE E A EET 45 1 5 15 T7316E KEM Module 47 15 16 T7406 T7406 0 ccc ccecceccdesstdeepdecbedbecgeebdeueeesase 48 1 6 Dialing COGS wizc seve ccensseeaisunccnenticpresteesvsubeseustenensinatieiont 49 1 7 Feature Codes ccecccccceccccececeeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenenaees 50 2 Telephony Features 2 1 Key System or PBX System e ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 54 2 1 1 Outgoing Call Routing 55 2 1 2 Incoming Call Routing 0 cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 2 2 Dial Plan esses vine aie sealed 57 2 3 Voicemail Operation cc eeceeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 59 2 4 Night Servite inona pa a e ea 60 2 5 Phantom Extensions cceeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeees 61 2 6 One Touch Transfer 62 2 7 Modem Access Support eeeeeerereieeirerrrrrnn 62 3 System Changes 3 1 Systemn Mod iissyndireiap a a 65 3 2 System NUMDETING cee eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeees 66 3 3 System Locale
36. 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 124 The display will show System Manual Backup Press Proceed to start the backup 4 If Proceed is not displayed or there is a problem additional text messages may be displayed e Shutdown and Insert Card No card was detected in the phone system s System SD card slot For correct operation of the phone system the Avaya SD card should always be present at all times e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested e Backup Failed This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the backup or the card has become corrupted 5 If the backup was successful Backup Successful is displayed gt e Exit programming by pressing aSa PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344
37. 2 not active ie use supervised disconnection e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 5 The change requires the system to be rebooted At the Immed Reboot prompt press Enter to reboot or Remove to cancel ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 129 Unsup Disconnect and the current setting are displayed IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 87 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 4 Enter the required value The default is 2 not active ie use supervised disconnection e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 5 The change requires the system to be rebooted At the Immed Reboot prompt press Enter 20 to reboot or Remove to cancel IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 88 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 5 Date and Time IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Pa
38. 2 to display Not Active Alternatively use the left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 2 3 4 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 128 The phone displays Network Time Synch Press either 1 to display Active the default setting or 2 to display Not Active e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 128 The phone displays Network Time Synch Press either 1 to display Active the default setting or 2 to display Not Active Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset
39. 28 November 2011 1 3 5 9508 This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system The programmable buttons are arranged in 3 pages of 8 to match the 8 physical buttons The buttons are numbered from top down left to right on each page The left arrow and right arrow buttons are used to switch between pages during normal operation MESSAGE PHONE ex as CONTACTS MENU Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 01 05 09 13 17 21 02 06 lt gt 10 14 lt gt 18 22 03 07 11 15 19 23 04 08 12 16 20 24 The button numbering order on these phones does not depend on the system mode However the default button usage is affected by the system mode e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 16 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview DS Phones 1 3 6 Administration Menus The following diagrams summarize the Admin menu options provided phones that use DS ports 1400 Series and 9500 Series The phones supported for phone base adm
40. 295 Shutdown 308 Simultaneous Page 281 Software Level 313 Spanish 69 148 Speed Dial 136 Personal 139 System 137 Station Lock 283 Station Unlock 285 Swedish 69 148 System Backup 300 Copy 304 Date 91 Default 306 Password 111 Reset 307 Restore 302 Shutdown 308 Index Time 92 Upgrade 309 System SD 308 313 System SD card 54 65 T Taiwanese 69 148 Time Daylight Saving 94 Network Time Synchronization 93 System Time 92 Toll Call Prefix 112 Transfer Ring on Transfer 207 Transfer Return Rings 209 U U Law 54 65 Unlock 285 Upgrade 309 V VMS Cover On Off 171 Coverage Rings 173 Delay 176 Hunt Delay 176 Hunt Schedule 213 Schedule 213 VMS Cover 287 Voice Mailbox Transfer 289 Voicemail Cover On Off 171 Coverage Rings 173 Delay 176 Hunt Delay 176 Hunt Schedule 213 Schedule 213 Voicemail collect 260 Voicemail On Off 287 Ww Wake Up Service 221 291 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 317 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 319 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discr
41. 3 4 5 6 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 612 The phone displays Contact Close Grp Enter the number for the contact closure 1 or 2 At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to assign to the contact closure group Press 1 Assigned or 2 Not assigned to change the extension s membership The default is 2 Not assigned To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 an un A U N At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 612 The phone displays Contact Close Grp Enter the number for the contact closure 1 or 2 At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to assign to the contact closure group Press 1 Assigned or 2 Not assigned to change the extension s membership The default is 2 Not assigned Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PAR
42. 307 Group Call Distribution 80 206 Hold Timer 216 127 Hunt Group 18 505 Intercom Dial Tone 15 309 Internal Hotline Ext 15 603 Line Assignment 75 gt 301 Line Coverage Extension 774 208 Line Ringing 20h lt button gt Line Ringing Pattern 204 209 Log Caller ID Extensions 145 317 Log Caller ID Extensions 145 318 Log Caller ID Extensions 145 319 Loudspeaker Paging Ext 13 gt 617 Manual Backup 30 124 Memory Card Startup Shutdown 31 733 Music on Hold 21 602 Network Time Synch 93 gt 128 Number of Lines 734 104 Night Service Button 18A 503 Night Service Grp Ext 185 504 OG Call Select 12 DS PBX Operator Group 19 DS PBX Outgoing Call Restr 10A 401 Outside Conference Denial 158 109 Override Line Ringing 206 324 Personal Ring Pattern 203 323 Personal Speed Dial 13 80 99 Pickup Group 18 501 Recall timer 8 5 107 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition Page 8 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Settings by Code 603 Internal Hotline Ext 15 604 Doorphone 1 Extension 605 Doorphone 2 Extension 606 Doorphone Alert Ext 125 612 Contact Close Grp l2 613 Type Contact Close 13 617 Loudspeaker Paging Ext 13 gt 728 System Reset 307 Reboot 729 System Shutdown 308 730 Remote Admin Password 29 731 System Upgrade 30 Reboot 7
43. 4 22pm would be entered as 1622 e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 103 The phone will display System Time 4 Enter the new time in the format HH MM The 24 hour clock is used for example 4 22pm would be entered as 1622 e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 103 The phone will display System Time 4 Enter the new time in the format HH MM The 24 hour clock is used for example 4 22pm would be entered as 1622 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 92 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Date and Time Changing the Time 5 3 N
44. 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter 1 regular or 2 machine The default is 2 regular ie normal dial tone e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 309 The phone displays Intercom Dial Tone At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed un BR W N Enter 1 regular or 2 machine The default is 2 regular ie normal dial tone e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administrat
45. 4 MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either press the first intercom or call appearance button or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Simultaneous Page and press Select 4 At the Endpoint prompt enter 70 5 The button function is changed to Simultaneous Page e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is disp
46. 80 increases the timer by 25 milliseconds Upon entry of the 2nd digit the recall timer is updated e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 86 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Line Settings Recall Timer Duration 4 9 Unsupervised Disconnect When using analog trunks various methods are used for trunk supervision ie to detect when the far end of the trunk has disconnected and so disconnect the local end of the call Depending on the locale the system uses Disconnect Clear signalling and or Busy Tone Detection This setting should only be enabled if it is know that the analog trunks do not provide disconnect clear signalling or reliable busy tone When enabled e Disconnect clear signalling detection is turned off Busy tone detection remains on e Unsupervised transfers and trunk to trunk transfers of analog trunk calls are not allowed e A wider range of busy tones which may signal the caller has disconnected are used to disconnect calls connected to voicemail e This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE
47. Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance System Default 17 8 System Reset Use this feature to reset the system while retaining the currently programmed settings Reset the system only when advised to do so by technical support personnel e WARNING This process will restart the phone system and disconnect all currently connected calls e The system reset begins immediately It takes approximately 5 minutes e This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 728 4 At the Reset Save All prompt press Proceed M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 728 4 At the Reset Save prompt press Enter e To exit phone based administration at a
48. Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 126 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Auxiliary Equipment Doorphone Programming 8 2 Contact Closures The system supports connection to two contact closure devices They can be used to control devices such as an electronic door lock Program the following features to enable the use of a contact closure e Contact Closure Group 128 Use this feature to specify which system extensions can activate each contact closure e Contact Closure Operation Type 13h Use this feature to specify how long the Contact Closures remain active when they are activated Other Functions e Contact Closure Button 25 gt Extensions with programmable buttons can have buttons assigned to operate the contact closures IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 127 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 8 2 1 Contact Closure Group Before a user can activate a contact closure you must assign the user s extension to the contact closure group for that contact closure If a contact closure is used to control a door lock and a doorphone is also installed at that door you may also want to assign the extensions in the contact closure group to also be the doorphone alert extensions 125 for that doorphone Users in the group can active the contact closure using a Contact Closure 25 button 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either o
49. Coverage Extension 774 for that line You can forward outside intercom transferred and voice signaled calls You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions coverage calls transfer return calls and night service calls The system will only forward calls on lines that have reliable disconnect For these lines Hold Disconnect Time 824 must be set to a value other than 00 No Detection The extension must have an available line to forward the call to an outside number The system uses the extension s Automatic Line Selection 844 to determine which line to use for the outgoing call 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone f 5 6 7 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Remote Call Forward When highlighted press Select At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit The current setting is displayed Enter 1 active or 2 not
50. Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 324 The phone displays Override Line Ringing At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 not active ie do not override the line ringing setting e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 206 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings Override Line Ringing 14 8 Ringing on Transfer Use this feature to specify what callers hear while they are being tra
51. Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Groups Night Service Group 13 4 Night Service Button Use this feature to program a button on the first extension on the system to turn night service on and off When night service is on all lines assigned to the telephones of the users in the night service group 18 ring immediately regardless of their normal line ringing settings Night service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours e You must program a Night Service Button on the first extension on the system e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation e If you reassign the Night Service Button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned e If you program a System Password 11 you must enter the password when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 104 and marked system speed dial numbers without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Password i
52. For BST phones is it assigned to the first button after any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance gt e Exit programming by pressing aSa PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 271 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 503 The phone displays Night Service Button The current setting is displayed If night service is already assigned to a button that button is lit 4 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned e Alternatively use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 5 If active press 3 to select the button to which night service is assigned At the Button prompt press the button to which you want night service assigned or enter the button number e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones it is assigned the first button after any line appearances For BST phones is it assigned to the first button after any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance e To exit phone based administration at any time press the
53. M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 85 4 The button function is changed to Do Not Disturb e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 256 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Do Not Disturb ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same
54. Mandarin 69 148 Manual Backup 300 Menus 17 Message Alert Notification 221 269 Mode Key 54 65 PBX 54 65 Mu Law 54 65 Music on Hold 218 N Name 146 Name Display 244 Network Time Synchronization 93 Night Service Button 187 271 Group 185 No ring 201 Norwegian 69 148 Notification 221 269 Number Account Code 165 Emergency 105 Number of Lines 73 Numbering 57 66 Numbers Allowed 97 Disallowed 101 O Optional SD 308 Outgoing Call Restriction 107 Outside Conference Denial 158 Overlays 20 P Page Loudspeaker 267 Simultaneous 281 Password IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 316 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Password Remote Administration 296 System Password 111 PBX Mode 54 65 PC Administration Password 296 Phone Overlays 20 Pickup Active Line 228 Call 238 Idle Line 263 Pickup Group 189 Button 273 Portuguese 69 148 Prefix 112 Privacy 275 Programmable buttons 54 65 Programming Menus 17 R Recall 277 Timer Duration 86 Recall Time 216 Redial Last Number 265 Saved Number 279 Remote Administration Password 296 Remote Call Forwarding 109 Removing an SD Card 308 Reset 307 Restore 302 Restriction 107 Ring Pattern 203 Ringing 194 Ringing on Transfer 207 Rings Abbreviated Ring 195 Call Coverage 197 Coverage 197 Transfer Return Rings 209 Russian 69 148 S Saved Number Redial 279 Schedule 213 SD card 54 65 SD Cards 308 Settings Copy Extension
55. O e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press Intercom 2 4 Enter the number for calls made using the button The number can include and and the following special characters Function Press to insert Character Description Pause HOLD Ps IInserts a 1 5 second pause e On 9500 Series phones these options are accessed by pressing More and select Pause Stop or Recall as required 5 The button function is changed to AD O followed by the stored number e Exit programming by pressing
56. OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 278 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Recall 16 29 Saved Number Redial This function allows the user to save the number dialed during a call and to redial that number when idle This can be used when the number dialed does not answer e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a cal
57. Permissions t Line Coverage Extension tVMS Coverage Rings SE ecu fe sapere Seay Equipment am am am me os L ie on Hne DAA en tOverride Line Ringing Lines 4 Co Disconnect Time Select Back System Administration System Parameters Select Back Extensions Line Assignment Select 4 Fax Machine Extension ry Outgoing Call Restr aaa eee a ee e t Music on Hold i i t Toll Call Prefix j 4Pickup Group l tinternal Hotline Ext t Set System Password tCalling Group 1 tDoorphone 1 Extension l t Disallowed Lists tNight Service Button l tDoorphone 2 Extension i t Disallowed To tNight Service Grp Ext i Doorphone Alert Ext t Emergency List i l tHunt Group I tContact Close Grp t Allowed Lists VMS Hunt Delay tType Contact Close tAllow To tVMS Hunt Schedule l tLoudspeaker Paging Ext t Forced Act Code List tOperator Group h Auxiliary Equipment Restriction Permissions Groups 4 Fax Machine Extension Outgoing Call Restr Pickup Group Select Back Select Back Select Back There are some programming functions that do not appear in the menu Instead they are accessed by dialing the appropriate code after having accessed the menu by pressing Admin System Administration Refer to the Programming Functions 8 The Groups Operator Group option is only available on systems running in PBX system mode IP Office Basic Edition P
58. Ring Pattern 20 Override Line Ringing 208 Reset Voice Mail Pwd 175 Copy Settings 295 Outgoing Call Restr 10 Toll Call Prefix 112 Set System Password 11 Disallowed Lists 10h Disallow To 103 Emergency List 105 Allowed Lists 97 gt Allow To 995 Forced Act Code List 165 Pickup Group 18 Calling Group 18 Night Service Button 18 Night Service Grp Ext 185 Hunt Group 18 VMS Hunt Delay 174 VMS Hunt Schedule 21A Fax Machine Extension 13 Music on Hold 21 Settings by Name e Abbreviated Ringing 195 305 Allow To 9 408 Allowed Lists 974 407 ARS Selectors 117 DS PBX Assign Line to AA 78 210 Auto Line Selection 844 Automatic Daylight Saving 94 gt 126 Automatic Extension Privacy 15 304 Call Coverage Rings 197 320 Call Waiting 15 316 Calling Group 18h 502 Calls Out 11 DS PBX Clear Backup Alarm 29 123 Co Disconnect Time 82 gt 203 Contact Close Grp 128 612 Copy Settings 295 399 Default Numbering 65 Reboot 734 Disallow To 103 405 Disallowed Lists 10 404 Display Language 144 303 Distinctive Ringing 19 308 Doorphone 1 Extension 12 604 Doorphone 2 Extension 125 605 Doorphone Alert Ext 124 606 Emergency List 10 406 Extension Name 14 External Hotline 154 311 Fax Machine Extension 13 601 Forced Act Code List 165 409 Forced Account Code 16A
59. Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press i Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either press the first intercom or call appearance button or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Active Line Pickup and press Select 4 At the Endpoint prompt enter 68 5 The button function is changed to Active Line Pickup lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the syst
60. This setting is used to switch the system between key system mode and PBX system mode e System Numbering 6 Set whether the system should use 2 digit or 3 digit extension numbering e System Locale 67 gt Set the locale country that the system is installed in This value adjusts a range of hidden trunks settings and the default system language e System Language 69 Set the default language for all extensions The display language 14 amp for individual extensions can be changed SD Cards The phone system has slots for SD cards which are used to store various files needed by the phone system The System SD slot must always contain an Avaya IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode SD card Cards can be inserted while the system is running However cards should only be removed while the system is shutdown This ensures that the card is not removed while files are being written to the card as that could cause corruption of those files IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 294 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance 17 1 Copy Extension Settings Set up your system by programming one extension for each type of telephone in the system You can then use copy settings to program other telephones of the same type For example you can program one 1408 telephone and then copy its settings to any other extensions that have 1408 telephones e This procedure is not listed w
61. To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 67 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Use the Next Process key to select Set Locale 4 Use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting e The possible locales are Canada Mexico and United States 5 Press Enter to use the currently displayed locale 6 The phone will prompt for an Immediate Reboot Press Enter to reboot the system and use the new locale setting e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 68 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Changes System Locale 3 4 System Language The system language is defaulted to match the system locale 674 This process can be used to see and change the language setting if required The language selection for an individual user can be set separately 148 from that of the system 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone i 4 At either of the first two extensions o
62. Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press 7 Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either press Intercom 2 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auto Dial Other and press Select 4 At the AD O prompt enter the number for calls made using the button The number can include and and the following special characters Function Press to insert Character Description Pause Inserts a 1 5 second pause Transfer SPEAKER Send a hook switch flash signal Stop CONFERENCE Stop dialing e On 9500 Series phones these options are accessed by pressing More and select Pause Stop or Recall as required 5 Click the Enter soft key 6 The button function is changed to AD O followed by the stored number e Ex
63. a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auxiliary Equipment When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Loudspeaker Paging Ext When highlighted press Select Enter the extension number of the extension port connected to the loudspeaker paging system or Clear to return to the default setting no loudspeaker Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 2 3 4 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 617 The phone displays Loudspeaker Paging Ext Enter the extension number and then press Enter e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting To exit phone based
64. all lines assigned to the telephones of the users in the night service group 18 amp ring immediately regardless of their normal line ringing settings Night service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours e You must program a Night Service Button on the first extension on the system e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation e If you reassign the Night Service Button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned e If you program a System Password 11 you must enter the password when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 104 and marked system speed dial numbers without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours e If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule 213 determines when outside calls should ring voicemail The status of the Night Service Button tells t
65. an absent message for display on their phone When set the absent message is also displayed on other extensions when they call the user e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e For IP Office Release 7 0 the button can also be used to check the absent message setting of other users When pressed pressing the Auto Dial Intercom 230 button of another user will display that users current absent message setting alternately select Insp and dial the user s extension number e Not supported on ETR6 and 1403 phones Not supported on BST phones without a display and soft keys 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programmin
66. be identified by type serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise no use should be made of materials on this site the Documentation s and Product s provided by Avaya All content on this site the documentation s and the product s provided by Avaya including the selection arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases You may not modify copy reproduce republish upload post transmit or distribute in any way any content in whole or in part including any code and software Unauthorized reproduction transmission dissemination storage and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code for those Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code
67. button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 812 4 The button function is changed to Caller ID Log e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 242 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Caller ID Log ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 23 The button function is changed to Caller ID Log e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode
68. button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Unsup Disconnect When highlighted press Select 4 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 not active ie use supervised disconnection e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting 5 The change requires the system to be rebooted At the Immed Reboot prompt press OK to reboot or Cancel to cancel M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 129 Unsup Discnct and the current setting are displayed 4 Enter the required value The default is
69. display on their phone When set the absent message is also displayed on other extensions when they call the user 9 This function allows the user to operate the system s contact closure 1 12 connection The user must be a member of the contact closure group 128 12 35 31 Contact Closure 1 41 42 This function allows the user to operate the system s 80 81 82 Contact Closure 2 contact closure 2 124 connection The user must be a member of the contact closure group 120 Displays the core software level that the system is running Displays the IP address of the systems LAN port Displays the feature key number of the System SD card This is the number used for validation of licenses entered into the system configuration System Release 313 System IP Address 31 SD Card Serial 59 Number 313 System Speed Diall 600 to 699 0 600 to 699 Dial the selected system speed dial number Personal Speed Dial 80 to 99 4 80 to 99 Dial the selected personal speed dial number DND Exception 700 to 719 0 700 to 719 Set a DND exception number Numbers 16 3 6 8 1 2 90 2 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 51 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 2 Telephony Features IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 53 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 2 Telephony Features Thi
70. display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Override Line Ringing When highlighted press Select At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit The current setting is displayed Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 not active ie do not override the line ringing setting e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required gt Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone a 2 3 4 5 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 324 The phone displays Override Line Ringing At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 not active ie do not override the line ringing setting e Alternatively use the Next
71. down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 06 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Conference Drop and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Conference Drop e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the
72. e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle the setting or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required gt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 307 The phone will display Forced Account Code 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 167 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O0 0 followed by two
73. e To enter a single digit wildcard press the left hand display soft key The wildcard is shown as an X e To enter a multiple digit wildcard press the middle display soft key The wildcard is shown as an N e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following To program the same extension To program another extension IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 161 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button Centralized Programming is shown on the display b Program Extension is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 Press FEATURE and dial 700 to 719 e The number used above is not a fixed reference For example if the exception number set using 702 is cleared any numbers set as 703 and above are move to 702 and above 3 The current number is shown if any e To clear the current number press the Mic HFAI key e To enter a number using the normal dialing keys e To enter a single digit wildcard press the Hold key The wi
74. exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 109 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 110 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Allow Remote Call Forwarding 6 8 System Password The system password is a four digit password that users can enter from their telephones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line Through system administration you can set and change the system password e The password overrides dialing restrictions e Once a password is programmed you must enter it to turn Night Service 18 on and off Additionally if night service is on users in the Night Service Group 185 must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List oand marked system speed dial 13 numbers e Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation e For M Series and T Series phones the system password if set is also used to control access to many phone based administration menus 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press t
75. extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 16 4 The button function is changed to Caller ID Name Display e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 245 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 13 Calling Group This function allows the user to call or page the calling group 18h represented by the button 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone ad
76. extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 01 4 The button function is changed to Do Not Disturb e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 257 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 19 Hot Dial This function allows the user to dial a number without first going off hook or pressing the SPEAKER button Automatic line selection 84 is used to select a line e This option is not used by DS and BST phones Those phone have hot dialing always switched on e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that inclu
77. extensions on the system press 4 Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 732 4 Press Enter to start the copy The phone displays Copy In Progress 5 If the copy is not successful the display will indicate the probable problem e Shutdown and Insert Card There is no SD card in either the Optional SD or the System SD card slot e Copy Failed Try Again This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the backup or the card has become corrupted e Card is Write Protected The SD card in the Optional SD card slot is write protected e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 304 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance System Copy ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Di
78. first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 305 The phone displays Abbreviated Ringing Enter the number of the extension to be programmed un fF U N Enter 1 or 2 The default is 1 active ie use abbreviated ringing e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 196 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings Abbreviated Ringing 14 2 Call Coverage Rings Use this feature to define the number of times intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at an extension before they are sent to the covering extension You can program the number of call coverage rings on an individual extension basis e If an extension has call coverage and voicemail coverage active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of call coverage rings e If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 173 e
79. followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 306 The phone displays Transfer Return Ext 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter the target extension number for transfer returns of calls transferred by the extension The default is the same extension e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 212 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings Transfer Return Extension 14 11 VMS Hunt Schedule Use this feature to determine whether the outside lines go to the voicemail auto attendant all the time only during day operation only during night operation or never You can program VMS Hunt Schedule on a per line basis When a line is set to go to the VMS auto attendant the VMS Hunt Delay 176 settings determines how long the call rings before going to the auto attendant e If you set the VMS Hunt Schedule for day only or night only you must program a Night Service button 18 for the first
80. following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 20 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Coverage and press Select 4 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 5 At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls 6 The button function is changed to Call Coverage O lt covere
81. icii 3 hiss dined etic nldeea geeks 67 3 4 System LANQGUAGE eee ee seneeeeeeteeeeeeeeeseeeeeenaeeeeeeeees 69 4 Line Settings 4 1 Number of LIn S ee eee ceseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneaes 73 4 2 Line Assignment igen iie 75 4 3 Line Coverage Extension cccccceseeeeeeeseeteeeeeeeees 77 4 4 Assign Line to Auto Attendant 78 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition Contents 4 5 Group Call Distribution 0 2 02 cceeeeceseeceeeeeeeenteeeeeeeees 80 4 6 CO Disconnect Time c cccscsesssssesseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 82 4 7 Automatic Line Sele ction ccccccscssceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 84 4 8 Recall Timer Duration cccccscssssssssceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 86 4 9 Unsupervised DISCONNECL eee eeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeenneeeeenes 87 5 Date and Time 5 1 Changing the Date oo ec eeeneeeeereeeeeneeeeenaeeeeeeeees 91 5 2 Changing the Time eeesceceseeeesereeeesneeeeeneeeeneeees 92 5 3 Network Time Synchronization cceeeeeeeeeeees 93 5 4 Automatic Daylight Savings Time 94 6 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 6 1 Allowed Number List ee eenen 97 6 2 Allowed List Assignment 99 6 3 Disallowed Number Lists 101 6 4 Disallowed List Assignment 103 6 5 Emergency Phone Number List seeee 105 6 6 Outgoing Call Restriction 107 6 7 Allow Remote Call Forwarding 109 6
82. is used to cover unanswered calls to an extension e VMS Coverage Rings 175 Set the voicemail coverage delay for calls to an extension User Admin Voicemail Password Users can set a password for their voicemail This password can be reset by through phone based administration if required e Voicemail Password 175 Line Auto Attendant Operation When a call goes to a line s VMS cover the voicemail system s auto attendant is used to take let the caller select a call destination e VMS Hunt Schedule 17A Set whether and when a line should route its calls to the voicemail auto attendant service if not answered within the VMS Hunt Delay time e VMS Hunt Delay 176 Set the number of rings for an external line before the call goes to the voicemail auto attendant if scheduled IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 170 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Voicemail 12 1 VMS Cover On Off You can use the processes below to switch on or off the use of voicemail coverage for an extension When on calls to the extension are redirected to the extension s mailbox when they ring unanswered for the extension s VMS Coverage Rings 173 setting When off calls to the extension continue to ring at the extension until answered or the caller hangs up e In addition to the processes below a VMS Cover 28 button can be programmed onto an extension with programmable buttons If the button
83. lines e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 73 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 104 4 Enter two digits for the number of outside lines in the system to assign to all extensions e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 74 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Line Settings Number of Lines 4 2 Line Assignment For systems running in key system mode the Number of Lines 734 setting is used during initial configuration to automatically assign lines to buttons to each extension The number of lines specified are assigned in numeric order starting from line 01 assigned to the button 03 upwards For systems running in PBX system mode no lines are automati
84. management is normally reserved for a system installer or maintainer only due to the nature of the settings that are accessible IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 7 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 1 Programming Functions The table below lists the settings that can be programmed from a suitable phone on the first two extensions in the system Settings by Code System Date 9 System Time 924 Number of Lines 734 Transfer Return Rings 20 Recall timer 8 Outside Conference Denial 15 Wake Up Service Button 29 Ringing on Transfer 20 Clear Backup Alarm 29 Manual Backup 300 Restore 302 Reboot Automatic Daylight Saving 9 Hold Timer 216 Network Time Synch 93 gt Unsupervised Disconnec 87 gt Reboot Co Disconnect Time 824 Group Call Distribution 8 Line Coverage Extension 77 gt Line Ringing Pattern 204 Assign Line to AA 7 Line Assignment 75 Display Language 148 Automatic Extension Privacy 15 Abbreviated Ringing 19 Transfer Return Extension 21h Forced Account Code 16 Distinctive Ringing 19 Intercom Dial Tone 15 gt VMS Cover 174 External Hotline 154 Call Waiting 15 Log Caller ID Extensions Log Caller ID Extensions Log Caller ID Extensions Call Coverage Rings 197 VMS Coverage Rings 173 Remote Call Forward 100 Personal
85. of up to 3 DBM32 button modules each module providing 32 programmable buttons On the button modules buttons are numbered from top down or bottom up depending on the system mode and then left to right IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 14 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview DS Phones 1 3 4 9504 This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system The programmable buttons are arranged in 3 pages of 4 to match the 4 physical buttons The buttons are numbered from top down left to right on each page The left arrow and right arrow buttons are used to switch between pages during normal operation VOLUME g MUTE Page 1 Page 2 01 03 05 07 02 04 lt gt 06 08 The button numbering order on these phones does not depend on the system mode However the default button usage is affected by the system mode e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons Page 15 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c
86. on the and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 Press Feature and the speed dial number to be programmed between 80 and 99 3 The current setting of the speed dial entry is displayed 4 Enter the external number The number can be up to 28 characters in length The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Pause Inserts a 1 5 second pause Transfer SPEAKER si Send a hook switch flash signal Stop CONFERENCE Stop dialing e On 9500 Series phones these options are accessed by pressing More and select Pause Stop or Recall as required 5 To remove the existing number press MIC HFAI e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 141 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 10 Extension Settings IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 143 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 10 Extension Settings The processes in this section cover a range of individual extension settings e Extension Name 146 Set the name displayed on the extension and on other extensions during calls
87. press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure rza e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 07 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Privacy and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Privacy gt e Exit programming by pressing aSa PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions
88. requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 9 42 4 The button function is changed to Contact Close 2 e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 254 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Contact Closure 2 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For butto
89. restrictions The is not dialed as part of the number If a is required to be dialed at the start of the marked system speed dial number enter 4 To remove a stored speed dial number press MIC HFAI once e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 138 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Speed Dials System Speed Dials 9 2 Personal Speed Dials Each extension can have 20 personal speed dials configured e To specify a system speed dial when making a call e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 80 to 99 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 480 to 499 e For users configured for remote call forwarding 10 a personal speed dial is used to set the destination for forwarded calls 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do
90. such third party which may own the Mark Nothing contained in this site the documentation s and product s should be construed as granting by implication estoppel or otherwise any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc All non Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners Downloading documents For the most current versions of documentation see the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Contact Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product The support telephone number is 1 800 242 2121 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support Page 2 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Contents 1 Overview 1 1 Programming Functions 8 1 2 Programmable Buttons cccccceceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 10 KIDS PHONES peene an eei eee 11 1 3 1 1403 1 3 2 1408 1 3 3 1416 1 3 4 9504 1 3 5 9508 1 3 6 Administration MenuS ceeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeees 17 1 4 ETR Phones iscscsdit iene dws eka 20 1 4 1 ETR 34D ETR 34eur 21 1 4 2 ETR 18D ETR 18 00 iiini 23 1 43 BTR 6DIETR O e e is ha a tiles 25 15 BST PHONES seis E hie ea ee 26 15 1 M7100 seii iiie 27 152 M7I00N eieaa e aa ia 28 1 5 3 M720 Bice issii irtenik vecaa ant iatera 29
91. system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 613 The phone displays Type Contact Close Enter the number for contact closure 1 or 2 The display shows the current setting for that contact closure ui A U N Enter the value for the action required e 1 1 Second on 2 3 Seconds on the default setting 3 5 Seconds on 4 Toggle e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 130 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Auxiliary Equipment Contact Closures IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 131 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 8 3 Loudspeaker Extension Loudspeaker paging systems allow you to broadcast a message over a large area Use this feature to specify the extension port to which you connected the loudspeaker paging system The extension is used by the Loudspeaker Page 267i and Simultaneous Page 28h functions 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during
92. system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 310 The phone displays Auto VM Cover 4 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number 5 Enter the required value The default is 1 active ie voicemail coverage on e 1 Active Assigned the default e 2 Not active Not assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 171 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 310 The phone displays Automatic VMS Cover 4 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number 5 Enter the required value The default is 1 active ie voicemail coverage on e 1 e 2 Active Assigned the default Not active Not assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to c
93. system mode the first two buttons 01 to 02 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 21 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 While being used in any of the programming modes the function of some keys changes as indicated by the overlay template below EL _ LJ Next Remove Prev Procedure IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 22 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview ETR Phones 1 4 2 ETR 18D ETR 18 This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system The ETR 18 is physically similar but lacks a display and so cannot be used for programming aD aD lt gt IH Programmable Buttons rs 5 z without lights s som smD sap saD saD S0 S saD SGD SGD sab sad SGD SGD 3D S saD E l r Programmable Buttons with lights Message Light pyu i AOLO VEO OO A M 0000 A hele UVO lt lt OO The button numbering order on these phones does not depend on the system mode However the default button usage is affected by the system mode e The programmable buttons are numbered from 01 l
94. the call On all phones the Call Screening button can be press to both turn off call screening and to ignore the currently screened call e When ignored e The call continues to be recorded until the caller hangs up or transfers out of the mailbox e The user s phone returns to idle with call screening still enabled However any other call that has already gone to voicemail is not screened e While a call is being screened e The mailbox greeting played and the caller can be heard on the phone s speakerphone The caller cannot hear the user e The user is regarded as being active on a call They will not be presented with hunt group calls and additional personal calls use abbreviated ringing e For 1400 9500 Series phones if the phone s default audio path is set to headset or the phone is idle on headset then the screened call is heard through the headset e Any additional calls that go to the user s mailbox when they are already screening a call remain at the mailbox and are not screened even if the existing call being screened is ended e Making or answering another call while listening to a screened call is treated as ignoring the screened call e Another user bridging into a screen call answers the call e Phone based administration cannot be accessed and the hold transfer and conference buttons are ignored e The screened caller using DTMF breakout ends the call screening e Enabling do not disturb overrides call screening exc
95. the call it alerts on the line appearance If there is no line appearance the call shall alert on an intercom button When an internal call follows transfer return it alerts on an intercom button If a call is transferred to an extension which is the transfer return destination for the transferring extension the call remains ringing at the transfer destination Transfer return calls ignore Do Not Disturb call forwarding call coverage and coverage to voicemail Transfer return calls that are answered at the return extension are not logged even if the Called ID log answered calls is set to Active 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Transfer Return Ext When highlighted press Select At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit The current setting is displayed Enter the target extension number for transfer retur
96. the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 984 4 The button function is changed to VMS Cover e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 287 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses
97. the restore e Shutdown and Insert Card No card was detected in the phone system s System SD card slot For correct operation of the phone system the Avaya SD card should always be present at all times e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested e Restore Failed Try Again This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the restoration or the card has become corrupted 4 If the restore is successful the system will be restarted IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 303 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 17 6 System Copy This process copies all files on the SD card in the System SD card to an SD card in the Optional SD card slot It includes the voicemail files including message files Any matching files and folders on the optional SD card are overwritten The card in the Optional SD card slot must be an SDHC type card 4GB capacity The process is a simple copy Any files already copied that change while the process is running are not recopied Any new files added for example voicemail messages while the process is running may not be copied This process can take up to approximately 90 minutes and may take much longer depending on the amount of data to be copied e This procedure is not listed when using the Nex
98. the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 207 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 208 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings Ringing on Transfer 14 9 Transfer Return Rings Use this feature which applies to all system extensions to define the number of times a transferred call rings before it returns to the transferring extension You can not set a transfer returned ring number for an individual extension For IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher an extension s transfer return calls can be redirected using a Transfer Return Extension 21h setting If you have a fax machine or an answering machine connected to the system set Transfer Return Rings to a number greater than the number of rings at which the devices answers The setting 0 rings means no transfer return This will mean that a caller who is transferred will not be returned even if their call is not answered The system does not start counting the number of rings for a transferred call to determine when it goes to
99. this feature is to have callers ring into a calling group of sales representatives e Extensions can be in more than one calling group e You can assign all extensions in the system to one group this helps in making paging announcements to all employees e Do not assign extensions that connect auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems fax machines answering machines hotline telephones or doorphones or extensions assigned as External Hotline telephones to a Calling Group e Users can make a simultaneous page 28h to the loudspeaker paging extension 13A and the extensions assigned to Calling Group 1 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the if SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Pickup Group When highlighted press Select 5 At the Group prompt enter the number of the group you want to adjust 6 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number whose group mem
100. to 699 FEATURE 80 to 89 FEATURE 0600 to 0699 FEATURE 480 to 499 All phones 600 to 699 80 to 89 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 136 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Speed Dials 9 1 System Speed Dials You can program a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers for the all users system by using System Speed Dial feature e A system speed dial number can be up to 28 characters in length and can consist of the digits 0 9 and the special dialing characters You assign the number to one of the codes 600 through 699 e To specify a system speed dial when making a call e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 600 to 699 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 0600 to 0699 e You can store account codes as system speed dial numbers for use with the account code entry feature e A marked system speed dial number overrides dialing restrictions To sets a system speed dial as a marked system speed dial the number should begin with a before the telephone number The digits in a marked system speed dial number do not appear on phone displays when the speed dial is used e A marked system speed dial number can begin with a star code To enter it press followed by the star code and then the telephone number For example press 675551001 e You cannot program system speed dial codes on Auto Dial buttons e If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex
101. to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 21 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Station Lock and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Station Lock e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A gt Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e I
102. to scroll the display to Pickup Group When highlighted press Select At the Group prompt enter the number of the group you want to adjust At the Extension prompt enter the extension number whose group membership you want to change N ODO wu A U Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required Aro e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 114 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 505 The phone displays Hunt Group 4 At the Group prompt enter a group number 5 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 6 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Do one of the following e To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the e
103. to the default setting Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another line gt Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 506 The phone displays VMS Hunt Delay Select day or night mode by entering 1 or 2 respectively Enter the line number The current setting is displayed Enter the required value for the number of rings between 0 and 6 2 is the default setting Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous line To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Oaa A UU N At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 506 The phone displays VMS Hunt Delay Select day or night mode by entering 1 or 2 respectively Enter the line number The current setting is displayed Enter the required value fo
104. up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press 4 Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extension Name When highlighted press Select 3 The current setting is displayed 4 To enter a new name dial the characters using the dial pad buttons When finished press Enter e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed On 9500 Series phones accented versions of the characters are also shown If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cursor will move onto the next space e The first character and the first character after a space are automatically capitalized e Use the left and right arrows keys to move the cursor e Do not use punctuation characters such as _ and in the name Start the name with an alphabetic character Note that the name is case sensitive and must be unique Non English languages do not offer accented characters 5
105. user s call coverage VMS coverage and call forwarding settings are applied to the call Any extension can be used as the destination including a phantom extension e Hunt Group The call is presented in sequence to each of the available members of a selected hunt group until answered Any of the 6 sequential hunt groups can be used as the destination e Line Appearance Buttons The call will alert on any line appearance buttons that matches the line Each line has a line number which can be assigned to line appearance buttons on users phones Users can answer the call by pressing the alerting line appearance button on their phone e Number of Lines 7 By default all analog lines in the system are assigned to line appearance buttons when the system is installed Lines are assigned for all users starting from button 03 upwards in order of line numbering e Line Assignment 75 Through individual user button programming any programmable button can be configured as a line appearance for a particular line e Auto Attendant Coverage Each line can be configured to send unanswered calls to an auto attendant after a set delay which can be set to 0 for immediate answer This can be set to operate when the system is in day and or night service This is done using the VMS Schedule VMS Delay Day VMS Delay Night and VMS Auto Attendant settings of each line The following methods can be used to override the normal call routing detailed above
106. users must enter it to turn Night Service 18 on off Also when night service is on users in the Night Service Group 18 must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to emergency phone numbers 10 and marked system speed dials 13A e Toll Call Prefix 11 gt Use this feature to indicate whether users must dial a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls before the area code to make a long distance call or just the area code and number IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 96 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 6 1 Allowed Number List Use this feature to specify telephone numbers that extensions associated with the list 99 can then dial regardless of other dialing restrictions You can create up to eight allowed number lists each containing up to 10 telephone numbers For example if you restrict an entire category of calls through a Disallowed Phone Number List 10 you can permit calls to a specific number in that category by placing that number in an allowed number list WARNING If you are restricting an extension from placing long distance calls do not place numbers beginning with a 0 on an Allowed Phone Number List for the extension Once a user is active on an operator assisted call the user can avoid dialing restrictions by asking the operator to dial restricted numbers e An allowed ph
107. using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 5 4 The button function is changed to Last Number Redial e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 265 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first inter
108. 1 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 9 41 4 The button function is changed to Contact Close 1 e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 252 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Contact Closure 1 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To selec
109. 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 12 The button function is changed to Account Code Entry e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 227 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 4 Active Line Pickup This function allows the user to answer a call on a particular line It can be used if the call is ringing held or already answered by another extension e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and then 68 and the line number 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to
110. 28 November 2011 Account Codes 11 1 Forced Account Code List You can create a list of account codes that are used to verify those entered by extension users e Each list entry can include up to six digits e You can enter a wildcard character into the account code to match any single digit For example your company s Sales Department has a three digit account code the first digit represents the department and second and third digits represent the individuals in the department You enter 4 as the list entry 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Restrictions Permissions When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Forced Act Code List When highlighted press Select 5 At the Entry prompt enter the list entry you want to change by entering 01 to 99 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter the new number and pr
111. 32 System Copy 304 733 Memory Card Startup Shutdown 314 734 Default Numbering 6 Reboot 989 System Default 306 80 99 Personal Speed Dial 13 600 699 System Speed Dials 13 lt button gt Line Ringing 20h ARS Selectors 11 DS PBX Auto Line Selection 8 Calls Out 118 DS PBX Extension Name 146 OG Call Select 12 DS PBX Operator Group 19 DS PBX System Language 695 System Locale 674 Reboot System Model 655 DS Reboot Overview Programming Functions Settings by Name Remote Admin Password 29 730 Remote Call Forward 10 322 Reset Voice Mail Pwd 175 325 Restore 302 Reboot 125 Ringing on Transfer 20 119 Set System Password 114 403 System Copy 304 732 System Date 9 101 System Default 30 989 System Language 6 System Locale 674 Reboot System Mode 65 DS Reboot System Reset 307 Reboot 728 System Shutdown 308 729 System Speed Dials 13 600 699 System Time 9 103 System Upgrade 308 Reboot 731 Toll Call Prefix 11 gt 402 Transfer Return Extension 21h 306 Transfer Return Rings 20h 105 Type Contact Close 130 613 Unsupervised Disconnect 87 Reboot 129 VMS Cover 174 310 VMS Coverage Rings 175 321 VMS Hunt Delay 176 506 VMS Hunt Schedule 21 507 Wake Up Service Button 294 115 e Items marked cannot be accessed using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure options
112. 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 311 The phone displays External Hotline 4 At the Extension prompt enter the external hotline extension number 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter the external number and press Enter Press Clear to remove any existing number The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Pause HOLD Ps IInserts a 1 5 second pause e On 9500 Series phones these options are accessed by pressing More and select Pause Stop or Recall as required e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 155 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 10 7 Internal Hotline Use this feature to identify an internal hotline extension and its alert extension When a user lifts the handset of the hotline telephone the alert extension rings You can set up several hotline and alert extension pairs The alert extension can be the same or different for multiple hotline extensions Use a single line telephone as the hotline telephone since this feature makes use only of the telephone s intercom The a
113. 508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auxiliary Equipment When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Internal Hotline Ext When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the hotline extension number 6 Enter the alert extension number Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Clear to remove the current setting e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 156 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Extension Settings Internal Hotline M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is req
114. 61 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 2 6 One Touch Transfer IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher supports one touch transfer operation with a number of different button types With a call currently connected the user can start the transfer process by pressing a button pre configured for the destination rather than having to first press TRANSFER The button types that support this operation are listed below Buttons programmed for voice or page calls can be used e Auto Dial ICM e Auto Dial ICM Page e Group Calling Ring e Group Calling Page e Group Hunting Ring e Group Hunting Page e Simultaneous Page 1 With a currently connected call the user starts the transfer by pressing the button programmed for the transfer destination 2 The system seizes an Intercom or call appearance button If no button is available the button press is ignored 3 When an button is seized the system puts the connected call on hold pending transfer and makes the voice or page call to the transfer destination 4 The user can switch between calls using the appropriate button for each call e If the transfer destination is busy the transfer cannot be completed The user should press the appropriate appearance button for the held call to reconnect to the caller 5 The user can complete the transfer by going on hook by either e Replacing the handset pressing SPEAKER or pressing HEADSET depending on how they
115. 7 The ARS Selectors are used to create groups of lines The same line can be in more than one group These are then used as the destination for outgoing external calls e Calls Out 11 The Dial Numbers table is used to match the number dialed by a user to a required ARS Select group number When a match is found an available line in that ARS Selector group is seized for the call e External Dialing Prefix 120 Sets whether a prefix is used for external dialing and what the prefix should be Other Options e System Mode 634 Select whether the system should run in either key system or PBX system mode e Operator Group 19 This group is the default destination for incoming calls for systems running in PBX system mode IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 116 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 PBX Mode Call Routing 7 1 ARS Selectors e PBX System Mode Only IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode systems can be installed in either key or PBX system mode This feature is only supported by systems running in PBX system mode The setting is ignored by systems running in key system mode An ARS selector is a group of lines Calls directed to an ARS selector by the system or by user dialing will seize an available line in that group ISDN selectors use all ISDN channels but apply a specific ISDN function to the call for example withhold number The system routes to an ARS selector based o
116. 8 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Wake Up Service Button When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed If night service is already assigned to a button that button is lit 6 Enter 1 assigned or 2 Not assigned The default is 2 ie not assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 7 If assigned press Button to select the button to which night service is assigned At the Button prompt press the button to which you want night service assigned or enter the button number e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones it is assigned the first button after any line appearances For BST phones is it assigned to the first button af
117. 8 System PaSSWOMG ccccccesesecsecssessecseeseessaeseeeeanens 111 6 9 Toll Call Prefix srias aa 112 7 PBX Mode Call Routing TAT ARS Selectors c eseccitcdeneeeseseteseeceesseerepseeetusseeneennere 117 C2 Call ClaSS S i issaccctticvvessevebeseneiay dd cdeceiep iae etrean 119 7 3 External Dialing Prefix 0 0 cccceccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeees 120 8 Auxiliary Equipment 8 1 Doorphone Programming c ccceeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeees 122 8 1 1 Doorphone Extensions c ccceeeeceeeeeeeees 123 8 1 2 Doorphone Alert Extension cceceeeeees 125 8 2 Contact CIOSUIES ccececeeceeeeseeeeceeeeeeecaeeeeeeseseeeees 127 8 2 1 Contact Closure Group eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaes 128 8 2 2 Contact Closure Operation Type 130 8 3 Loudspeaker Extension ereenn 132 8 4 Fax Machine Extension 2c ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeees 133 9 Speed Dials 9 1 System Speed Dial eee ereere 137 9 2 Personal Speed Dials ieee 139 10 Extension Settings 10 1 Caller ID Log All Calls 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeetteeeneeenaee 145 10 2 Extension Name cccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee 146 10 3 Display LAnguage eee sees eeeeeeeenneeeeeneeeenneeeens 148 10 4 Call Waiting ee eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeneeseneeseaeeneeenaes 150 10 5 Intercom Dial Tone cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenteeeeeeees 152 10 6 External Hotline cccccececceeeeeeceeeeeee
118. 99 can also be entered The current setting is displayed e 1 Assigned The line is already assigned to a button on the extension Changing the setting to not assigned will remove the line from the line appearance e 2 Not assigned The line is not assigned to a button on the extension Changing the setting to assigned will add the line to the next button after lines already assigned to buttons on the extension 7 Enter 1 or 2 to change the setting Alternatively use the left or right arrow icons to toggle the setting e Pressing Default will assign the line to the next non line button after the intercom or call appearance buttons e Pressing Button allows the line to be assigned to a particular button by entering the button number or pressing the button 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another line to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 75 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 301 The phone displays Line Assignment 4 At the Extension prompt enter the extensi
119. A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 986 4 The button function is changed to VM Transfer e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 289 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or ca
120. A PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 989 4 When the Restart Defaults prompt is displayed dial 25327 CLEAR 5 The system will be immediately restarted M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 989 4 When the Restart Default prompt is displayed dial 25327 CLEAR 5 The system will be immediately restarted e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 989 4 When the Restart Defaults prompt is displayed dial 25327 CLEAR 5 The system will be immediately restarted IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 306 IP Office
121. ARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 17 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 3 6 2 Admin2 Administration Menu The Admin2 menu is only shown on the first two extensions in the system The System Mode option is used to select whether the system runs in either key or PBX system mode The additional options are only available when the system is running in PBX system mode and are used to configure the outgoing call routing for the system when a user dials after going off hook 12 30 Wed 3 56pm x10 pea l t Local Status Feature Admin t National l l t International SS cps se o y l m m m m m c m o c e e e c m a l ma E I Targets 65 66 65 66 System Administration Toll Free l Numbers tCentalized Programming l tTelephone Programming i Calls Out Calls Out Emergen i tAdmin2 t Emergency 1 Targets 65 66 65 66 Se eS ete Sele Back Clear Cancel 66 ISDN Standard Call System Mode rr 67 ISDN Number Withheld fF T9990 I ee bf Emergency Numbers TARS Selectors ARS Selectors 112 TOG Call Select lt None gt 4 65 Group of Lines Delete Done Serer 2 Select Admin2 Bea Bee Ess System Mode lt PBX gt ae SS Saag Save Cancel aed ee ae IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 18 IP Office Basic Edition Issu
122. AVAYA IP Office Basic Edition IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Issue 4c 28 November 2011 2011 AVAYA All Rights Reserved Notices While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya assumes no liability for any errors Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes Documentation disclaimer Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya Avaya s agents servants and employees against all claims lawsuits demands and judgments arising out of or in connection with subsequent modifications additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by End User Link disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation s provided by Avaya Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them Avaya does not guarantee that thes
123. D slot to the System SD card and restart the system with the new configuration e WARNING This process will restart the phone system and disconnect all currently connected calls e This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 125 The display will show System Manual Backup Press Proceed to start the restore 4 If Proceed is not displayed or there is a problem additional text messages may be displayed e Shutdown and Insert Card No card was detected in the phone system s System SD card slot For correct operation of the phone system the Avaya SD card should always be present at all times e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested e Restore Failed Try Again This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the restoration or the
124. Default to return to the default setting 4 Rings e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Enter the number of rings O off to 9 The default is 4 rings e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 105 The phone displays Transfer Return A U N Enter the number of rings O off to 9 The default is 4 rings e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 210 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings Transfer R
125. ER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 123 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 124 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Auxiliary Equipment Doorphone Programming 8 1 2 Doorphone Alert Extension If your system has extensions defined as doorphone extensions 124 you can use this feature to which other extensions are alerted when a doorphone button is pressed e If Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled e If a contact closure controls a door lock consider assigning the doorphone alert extensions to the Contact Closure Group 12 amp for that contact closure as only those extensions can activate the door lock 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the 14 SPEAKER k MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down
126. Exit programming by pressing acta PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 320 The phone displays Call Coverage Rings 4 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter the number of rings required between 1 and 9 The default is 2 10 seconds e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 197 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 320 The phone displays Call Coverage Rings Enter the number of the extension to be programmed wu BR U N En
127. Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter 1 to 8 1 to 4 for a BST phone The default setting is 1 e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 323 The phone displays Ring Pattern 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 At the Pattern prompt enter a ringing pattern number 1 to 8 1 to 4 for a BST phone The default setting is 1 e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the firs
128. Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 233 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 7 Call Coverage This function allows the user to switch call coverage for their extension on or off The button settings include the extension number of the extension providing coverage When on calls to the user that ring unanswered for the user s number of coverage rings 19 then also start ringing at the call coverage extensions e When on a call to the extension that ring unanswered for the extension s Call Coverage Rings 19 setting will also start alerting on the covering extension specified by the button e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function does not require a button that includes LEDs LCD However if set on a button with an LEDs LCD it will indicate when the function is on e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Programming the destination and or the originator onto the call coverage button is optional e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 20 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 932 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the
129. ID 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Night Service Button When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed If night service is already assigned to a button that button is lit 6 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting Alternatively use the left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 7 If assigned press Button to select the button to which night service is assigned At the Button prompt press the button to which you want night service assigned or enter the button number e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones it is assigned the first button after any line appearances
130. If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage e An extension user can switch call coverage on or off using a Call Coverage 234 button The button is also used to set the coverage extension e One ring is approximately 5 seconds 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the If SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Coverage Rings When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter the number of rings required between 1 and 9 The default is 2 10 seconds e Alternatively use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e
131. Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 134 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 9 Speed Dials IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 135 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 9 Speed Dials Speed dials allow the rapid dialing of frequently used telephone numbers e System Speed Dials 137 Up to 100 system speed dials numbered 600 to 699 can be configured for use by all extensions When used normal dialing restrictions are applied However marked system speed dials can be created which override dialing restrictions System speed dials can only be edited using a system administrator phone on the first two extensions in the system e Personal Speed Dials 13 Each extension can have up to 20 personal speed dials numbered 80 to 89 configured These can be edited by the extension user and from a system a system administrator phone on the first two extensions in the system Dialing restrictions are applied to all personal speed dials Dialing Speed Dials The following methods can be used to dial a system or personal speed dial from an extension Phone Type System Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial ETR 18D ETR34D 1408 1416 FEATURE 600
132. M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial 8 5 The button function is changed to Idle Line Pickup e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 263 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same
133. OR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS YOU AND END USER AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC OR THE APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE AVAYA Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition License types Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to
134. Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 604 for doorphone 1 or 605 for doorphone 2 The phone displays Doorphone 1 Extension or Doorphone 2 Extension respectively 4 At the Doorphone prompt the current setting is displayed 5 At the Extension prompt enter the alerting extension number Press Remove to clear any current setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 604 for doorphone 1 or 605 for doorphone 2 The phone displays Doorphone 1 Extension or Doorphone 2 Extension respectively 4 At the Doorphone prompt the current setting is displayed 5 At the Extension prompt enter the alerting extension number Press Remove to clear any current setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively IP Office Basic Edition PARTN
135. Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 321 The phone displays VMS Cover Rings 4 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter the number of rings required between 1 and 9 The default is 3 15 seconds e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 173 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 321 The phone displays VMS Cover Rings Enter the number of the extension to be programmed wu BR U N Enter the number of rings required between 1 and 9 The default is 3 15 seconds e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change
136. Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 238 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Call Pickup ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 9 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial 6 followed by the target extension number 5 The button function is changed to Call Pickup followed by the target extension number e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 239 IP Office Basic Edition
137. Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 503 The phone displays Night Service Button The current setting is displayed If night service is already assigned to a button that button is lit 4 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 5 If active press 3 to select the button to which night service is assigned At the Button prompt press the button to which you want night service assigned or enter the button number e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones it is assigned the first button after any line appearances For BST phones is it assigned to the first button after any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 272 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Night Service 16 26 Pickup Group Thi
138. T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Pad Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 733 The display will show Select Memory Card 4 Enter 1 for the System SD card or 2 for the Optional SD card e If the selected card is current running the option Immediate Shutdown is displayed To start the process press the Enter button otherwise press The status will change to Shutting Down and then Shut Down Check that the LED for that card slot is extinguished before removing the card e If the selected card has been shut down the option Start Up is displayed To start the process press the Enter button otherwise press The status will change to Starting Up and then Started Up e If the selected card is not present the message No Card is displayed e If the selected card is currently performing another process which should not be interrupted System Busy is displayed e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 311 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0
139. TNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 128 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Auxiliary Equipment Contact Closures IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 129 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 8 2 2 Contact Closure Operation Type Each of the two contact closures when activated can be activated for 1 3 or 5 seconds or toggled For example if a contact closure that controls a door lock is set to 5 seconds on the door lock is released for 5 seconds when a user activates that contact closure If the contact closure is set to toggle the contact closure must be activated and deactivated by separate user actions For example one user can activate the contact closure and another user can deactivate it 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin Azo e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auxiliary Equipment When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or dow
140. TR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 401 The phone displays Outgoing Call Restr 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 To change the type of call restriction enter the required value e 1 No Restriction can make toll local and internal calls this is the default setting e 2 Internal only e 3 Local internal and local only e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 108 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Outgoing Call Restriction 6 7 Allow Remote Call Forwarding All extensions can forward their incoming calls to another extension using call forwarding 236 This option is used to configure whether the extension can also forward calls to external numbers remote call forwarding For analog lines and T1 lines without DID the extension must be the Line
141. TR Phone Software Level 9 80 Displays the core software level that the system is running Feature Key Number IP Address 591 9 81 Displays the IP address of the systems LAN port 9 82 Displays the feature key number of the System SD card This is the number used for validation of licenses entered into the system configuration IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 313 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 314 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Index 2 2 Digit 57 66 3 3 Digit 57 66 5 590 313 592 313 593 313 A Abbreviated Ringing 195 Absent Message 224 Account Code 164 Entry 167 Entry Button 226 Account Code List 165 Active Line Pickup 228 Administration Password 296 Alarm 299 A Law 54 65 Alert Doorphone 125 Alert Notification 221 269 Allowed Numbers List 97 List Assignment 99 ALS 84 Arabic 69 148 Auto Dial Intercom 230 Other 232 Autodialling 152 Automatic Backup 300 Automatic Daylight Saving 94 Automatic Line Selection 84 Auxiliary Doorphone Extension 123 Auxiliary Equipment Doorphone 122 Fax Machine 133 Auxliliary Equipment Loudspeaker Extension 132 B Backup 300 Backup Alarm 299 Brazilian 69 148 Button Functions 220 Line Assignment 75 Message Alert Notification 221 269 Night Service 187 271 Programming 220 Buttons Callappearance 54 65 Intercom 54 65 L
142. To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press i Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either press the first intercom or call appearance button or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Loudspeaker Page and press Select 4 At the Endpoint prompt enter 70 5 The button function is changed to Loudspeaker Page lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of anoth
143. To remove the current name press Clear e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 146 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Extension Settings Extension Name M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A gt Feature and dial 1 or Ja At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password F b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 3 Enter the extension name e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cursor will move onto the next space af s ee Ba zarcasc eor a 4ghiGHt s Koa 6 omnowno_ 7parsPQRS Se eww e wywo een ol ospace e0 e e Do not use punctuation characters such as _and in the name Start the name with an alphabetic character Note that the name is case sensitive and must be unique Non English languages do
144. Transfer 207 14 9 Transfer Return RINS 209 14 10 Transfer Return Extension 211 14 11 VMS Hunt Schedule 213 15 Holding Calls 15 1 Hold Recall Time iisi 216 15 2 Music on Hold 2 2ccaz estes nctceecesateciss eta i ao teesetia yest 218 16 Button Programming 16 1 Button Programming Functions 221 16 2 Absent MeSSage ee ceeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenneeeee 224 16 3 Account Code Entry 226 16 4 Active Line PiCkUp 0 c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeee 228 16 5 Auto Dial INtercomM eeen 230 16 6 Auto Dial Other ec ceeeceeeceeeeeneeeeeeesneeeeneeeees 232 16 7 Call COVEraGE 0 iinis centr eeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeteeeneeene 234 16 8 Call Forwarding eee eeecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeenneeene 236 16 9 Call PICKUP t e0 e ecch insets nee ieee 238 16 10 Caller ID Inspect 240 16 11 Caller ID Logs Siina Raed ee 242 16 12 Caller ID Name Display 244 16 13 Calling GrouUp sssseesseereeeeriresrrsrrirerirresrirerrrsreens 246 16 14 Call Screening irii iseni giie enii e ia ai 248 16 15 Conference Drop sssseeeirseisrrierrrerrirrerrereen 250 16 16 Contact Closure 1 252 16 17 Contact Closure 2 0 0 eee ete eenneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenneeeee 254 16 18 Do Not Disturb cece eeeee eee guniguni 256 16219 HOt Dials sir ets baleen e edo Abie eee 258 16 20 Hunt GrO P nonidan apren i eines 260 16 21 Idle Line PiCkUp ce eeeceeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 263 16 22 Last Number Redial
145. When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Allowed Lists When highlighted press Select At the List Number prompt enter 1 to 8 for the list you want to edit At the Entry prompt enter the list entry you want to change by entering 01 to 10 The current setting is displayed N OD HO A Enter the new number and press Enter To enter a wildcard digit press HOLD Press Clear to remove the existing number 9 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the other numbers in the list e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 97 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 407 The phone displays Allowed Lists 4 At the List Number prompt enter a list number 1 to 8 5 At the Entry prompt select a list entry 01 to 10 6 Enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory press Enter Do one of the following e To delete the telephone number you just entered p
146. active The default is 2 not active e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle the settings or Default to return to the default setting Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 2 3 4 5 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 322 The phone displays Remote Call Forwarding Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter 1 active or 2 not active The default is 2 not active To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 322 The phone displays Remote Call Forwarding Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter 1 active or 2 not active The default is 2 not active Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also
147. administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 617 The phone displays Loudspeaker Paging Ext Enter the extension number and then press Enter e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 132 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Auxiliary Equipment Loudspeaker Extension 8 4 Fax Machine Extension Use this feature to identify the extensions to which fax machines are connected Switch off VMS Coverage for any extensions assigned as fax extensions The system auto attendant can be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or to the extension Hunt Group containing fax extensions if you have multiple fax machines 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt e To do the above during a call you
148. affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Admin2 When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to OG Call Select 4 Use the 4 left or right arrow icons to change the setting between None 9 and 0 5 Click Save 6 The menu will prompt Immediate Reboot Select either Confirm or Cancel lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 120 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 8 Auxiliary Equipment IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 121 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 8 Auxiliary Equipment This section details processes relating to auxiliary equipment that can be attached to the system e Contact Closures 12 Set which extensions can operate the contact closures attached to the system These can be used to operate devices such as door openers e Fax Machine Extension 13 Indicate which extension is a fax machine e Loudspeaker Extension 13 gt Indicate which extension is connected to a loudspeaker device e Doorphone Extension 12 gt I
149. age 297 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 730 4 If a system password 11h has been set the prompt Enter Sys Password is displayed Enter the four digit system password 5 The current remote administration password is displayed or dashes if no password has been set Enter or change the password e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cursor will move onto the next space seers E abeasc BY efer Ba 4gnicHt ES oe S e GmmoMNO 8 stwruv Swxyzwxvz E inn o ossee C gt e Do not use punctuation characters such as _ and in the password Note that the password is case sensitive and must be unique 2 To save the password press Enter 204 The bottom line of the display shows the password as it has been entered e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 298 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance Remote Administration Password 17 3 Clearing a Back
150. age extensions Caller ID Log 24 This function allows the user to view the phone system s call log of all caller IDs of calls received by the system To use the button the user must be one of the three extensions configured for call ID logging 1455 Call Forwarding 238 This function allows the user to redirect all their calls to another number Extensions with Remote Call Forwarding 10 enabled can also forward calls externally by specifying a personal speed dial 13 as the destination Call Pickup 238 This function allows the user to pickup a call alerting ata Intercom 1 6 lt Extn gt specified extension Separate buttons can be created for each extension for which call pickup is required Caller ID Inspect 240 This function allows the user to see the caller ID of a call on another line without interrupting the current call to which they are connected Caller ID Name Display This function allows the user to swap the display of caller F933 F16 Yes 24 ID name and number information on their extension Calling Group 24 This function allows the user to call or page the calling Intercom 1 lt Group gt group 18 represented by the button Call Screening This function is used to enable or disable call screening F939 F25 Yes While enabled when a caller is presented to the user s voicemail mailbox if the user s phone is idle they will hear through the phone s handsfree speaker the caller leaving the message and can select to answe
151. al 732 4 Press Enter 204 to start the copy The phone displays Copy In Progress 5 If the copy is not successful the display will indicate the probable problem e Shutdown and Insert Card There is no SD card in either the Optional SD or the System SD card slot e Copy Failed Try Again This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the backup or the card has become corrupted e Card is Write Protected The SD card in the Optional SD card slot is write protected e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 305 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 17 7 System Default Use this feature to reset the system and return its configuration to the default settings Reset the system only when advised to do so by technical support personnel e WARNING This process will restart the phone system and disconnect all currently connected calls e The system reset begins immediately It takes approximately 5 minutes e This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the AS
152. al over the telephone line to the local telephone company or PBX to which the system is connected Typically you use the Recall feature to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Your local telephone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 milliseconds You should change the default setting only under two conditions e If using the system Recall feature has no effect lengthen the time e If the system is connected to a PBX and Recall drops calls shorten the time 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the If SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Recall timer When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter then option required between O1 and 80 Each step increases the timer by 25 milliseconds Alternat
153. amming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press P Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 05 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Last Number Redial and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Last Number Redial e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are
154. ance buttons External calls are made and answered using line External calls are made and answered using the call appearance buttons appearance buttons The line used for outgoing external calls is determined The line used for outgoing external calls is determined by the line button pressed from the number dialed Automatic line selection defaults to the analog lines Automatic line selection defaults to the 3 call present and then the 2 intercom buttons appearance buttons 2 on ETR phones e WARNING Changing the system mode will also default most settings including all button programming e WARNING This process will restart the phone system and disconnect all currently connected calls 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Admin2 When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Mode When highlighted press Select 4 Use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle the setting between Key or PBX 5 Click Save 6 The menu will prompt Immediate Reboot Select either Confirm or Cancel e Ex
155. and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 5 Press Program and either dial 25 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Screening and press Select 6 The button function is changed to Call Screening gt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature user ie Feature 8737 2 If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 3 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 4 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 5 Dial Feature 939 6 The button function is changed to Call Screening e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button Centralized Programming is shown on the display 2 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the e
156. and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support Web site http support avaya com Copyright Preventing toll fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Be aware that there can be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services Avaya fraud intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support Web site http support avaya com Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com Trademarks Avaya and Aura are trademarks of Avaya Inc The trademarks logos and service marks Marks displayed in this site the documentation s and product s provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya its affiliates or other third parties Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or
157. any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 206 The phone displays Group Call Distrib At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 to 6 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 An R WN Enter 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not assigned e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 81 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 4 6 CO Disconnect Time Use this feature to change the disconnect time for an outside line When a caller on hold hangs up the local telephone company may send a special signal to the system to free the line Different telephone companies use different length signals The length of the signal is called the disconnect time If you place a call on hold and the caller hangs up but the call does not disconnect within a minute after the caller hangs up the disconnect time is probably set too high or set at No Detection e If the telephone company does not send a signal kee
158. applies to lines that a user has access to with Direct Line Pickup Idle Line e To override this feature users can dial marked system speed dial number 134 and numbers from an Allowed Phone Number List 974 and the Emergency Phone Number List 1035 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Restrictions Permissions When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Outgoing Call Restr When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter 1 2 or 3 Alternatively use the left or right arrow icons to toggle the settings or Default to return to the default setting e 1 No Restriction can make toll local and internal calls this is the default setting e 2 Internal only e 3 Local internal and local only e Alternatively use the left o
159. asic Edition Page 37 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Administration Mode Buttons The diagram below indicates the button functions during phone based administration processes IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition Page 38 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 5 9 KLM Module Overview BST Phones This type of button module can be used with the M7324 354 phones to provide additional programmable buttons 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Page 39 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 5 10 T7000 This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone from another extension Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 40 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview BST P
160. ation When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auxiliary Equipment When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 184 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Music on Hold When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is shown 6 Press 1 or 2 The default is 1 ie music on hold is on e 1 Active Assigned the default e 2 Not active Not assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 602 The phone displays Music on Hold 4 Enter the required value The default is 1 ie music on hold is on e 1 Active Assigned the default e 2 Not active Not assigned e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system
161. ation during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 17 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Caller ID Inspect and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Caller ID Inspect lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 811 4 The button f
162. ay to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 42 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Contact Closure 2 and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Contact Closure 2 e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or j a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is
163. bership you want to change 7 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required gt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 502 The phone displays Calling Group 4 At the Group prompt enter a group number 5 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 6 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Do one of the following e To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 6 e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or d
164. by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 243 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 12 Caller ID Name Display This function allows the user to swap the display of caller ID name and number information on their extension On some phones after the call is answered the call display is not able to show both the caller ID name and number This function allows the user on such phones to toggle between the name and the number e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 16 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 933 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or
165. c Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 147 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 10 3 Display Language Use this feature to change the language used for messages that appear on telephone display The language is set for each extension so telephones in the same system can display different languages 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Display Language When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed e The possible language options available are English French and Spanish e Alternatively use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pre
166. cally assigned to buttons For both modes the Line Assignment function can be used to the add additional line appearance buttons e WARNING New lines assigned are added to the next button in sequence after any existing line appearance buttons If the next available button is programmed with a function that button will be overwritten by the line appearance For DS and ETR phones the lines are assigned to the buttons after the intercom key system mode or call appearance buttons PBX system mode For BST phones 265 the buttons used will depend on the phone model 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the if SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Line Assignment When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 At the Line prompt enter the two digit line number For systems running in PBX mode the number of an ARS selector 65 to
167. card has become corrupted 5 If the restore is successful the system will be restarted M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 125 The display shows System Manual Restore 4 Press Enter to start the restore e Shutdown and Insert Card No card was detected in the phone system s System SD card slot For correct operation of the phone system the Avaya SD card should always be present at all times e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested e Restore Failed Try Again This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the restoration or the card has become corrupted IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 302 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance Restore the Configuration ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 125 The display shows System Manual Restore 4 Press Enter 204 to start
168. cedure 205 Prev Procedure 204 and enter a new group number Then repeat Steps 5 and 6 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 190 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Groups Pickup Groups 13 6 Operator Group For systems running in PBX system model 654 the operator group is used as the default destination all DID calls By default the group contains the first extension on the system It can also be selected as the destination for incoming SIP trunk calls e PBX System Mode Only IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode systems can be installed in either key or PBX system mode This feature is only supported by systems running in PBX system mode The setting is ignored by systems running in key system mode 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups When
169. com or call appearance button 4 Dial the pickup groupl18 number for the button 661 to 664 5 The button function is changed to Pickup Group followed by the pickup group number e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 274 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Pickup Group 16 27 Privacy This function allows the user to turn privacy on or off When on other extensions are not able to bridge into the user s calls e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function does not require a button that includes LEDs LCD However if set on a button with an LEDs LCD it will indicate when the function is on e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 07 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 83 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension
170. com or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 05 4 The button function is changed to Last Number Redial e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 266 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Last Number Redial 16 23 Loudspeaker Page This function allows the user to make a page call to the extension configured as being connected to the loudspeaker equipment 132 e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and dial 70 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension
171. contains T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID callers will receive busy signal when all extensions in the Hunt Group are busy for example off hook have Do Not Disturb activated or are in programming mode e Example Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group This lets outside callers ring the group directly without being transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Lines When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Group Call Distribution When highl
172. croll the display to ARS Selectors When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the existing selectors and the option Add 5 To add a new selector a Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to and select Add b Enter a two digits number for the selector between 65 and 99 Click on the down arrow button c At the Type prompt use the left or right arrow icons to toggle the setting e Group of Lines This type of selector is used to create a group of lines For a call routed to this selector an available line from that group is used This is the only option available in a system with just analog trunks d If the Type is Group of Lines click Edit to add lines 6 To edit an existing selector a Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to the existing selector b Click Edit c Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the available line Click Add to add a line to the selector d Use Clear to remove all the lines e Use Done when the lines are set as required gt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 117 IP Office Basic Edition Issu
173. ct the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 71 4 The button function is changed to Recall e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 277 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press FEATURE 03 The button function is changed to Recall e Exit programming by pressing Feature
174. ctive press 3 to select the button to which night service is assigned At the Button prompt press the button to which you want night service assigned or enter the button number e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones it is assigned the first button after any line appearances For BST phones is it assigned to the first button after any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 503 The phone displays Night Service Button The current setting is displayed If night service is already assigned to a button that button is lit 4 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 5 If active press 3 to select the button to which night service is assigned At the Button prompt press the button to which you want night service assigned or enter the button number e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones i
175. d 2 alert extension e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 125 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 606 The phone displays Doorphone Alert Ext 4 Enter the first alert system extension number 5 Enter the required value Value Setting No alert This is the default setting Doorphone 1 alert extension ESS Doorphone 2 alert extension a Doorphone 1 and 2 alert extension e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office
176. d either press Intercom 1 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Hunt Group and press Select 4 At the Endpoint prompt enter the hunt group 18 number for the button 771 to 776 The additional number 777 can be used for access to voicemail to collect messages e A page call that is auto answered by the first available extension in the hunt group can be selected by adding a in front of the hunt group number 5 The button function is changed to Hunt Group e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A gt Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Press the fir
177. d extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 234 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Call Coverage M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password i b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 932 4 At the CovOrig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 5 At the CovDest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls 6 The button function is changed to Cover O lt covered extension gt D lt destina
178. de Phone Based Administration Page 241 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 11 Caller ID Log This function allows the user to view the phone system s call log of all caller IDs of calls received by the system To use the button the user must be one of the three extensions configured for call ID logging 14 e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 23 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 812 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press i Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure ra e To do the above d
179. de Phone Based Administration Page 293 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 17 System Maintenance The functions in this section are not shown when browsing the menu of system administration options on a phone Instead they are only displayed when the appropriate code is entered in the menu e Copy Extension Settings 295 Copy the user settings except name and number from one extension to another of the same type e Remote Administration Password 298 Change the password used for PC access to the system configuration settings e Backup the Configuration 300 Backup the current configuration e Restore the Configuration 30 gt Copy a previous backup of the configuration file from a card in the Optional SD slot to the System SD card and restart the system with the new configuration e System Copy 30 Copy the System SD card files to the Optional SD card e System Default 308 Restart the system and return all settings to their defaults e System Reset 30 Save the system settings and restart the system e System Shutdown 308 Save the system settings and shutdown the system for maintenance e System Upgrade 308 Copy new software from the Optional SD card to the System SD card and then restart the system using the new software Other Functions The following settings affect system operation These functions should typically only be performed when a system is first installed e System Mode 65
180. de calls also ring with the two transfer beeps e Since only one audible alert can be heard at a station at one time the ringing pattern present at that extension that has multiple lines alerting is for the line that pattern associated with the next alerting line for that extension e The actual ring patterns vary depending on the phone type e Calls direct to an extension will use the line ringing pattern unless the user has Override Line Ringing 208 active e Through system web management ringing patterns can also be assigned for DID routes These override the setting of the line 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Lines When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Ring Pattern When highlighted press Select 5 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter the ring pat
181. des an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e To access this function without a programmable button press FEATURE and then dial 26 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press i Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 26 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Hot Dial and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Hot Dial e Exit programming by pr
182. display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press FEATURE 07 The button function is changed to Privacy e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 276 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Privacy 16 28 Recall This function allows the user to send a recall or hook flash signal e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extens
183. down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press i Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 16 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Caller ID Name Display and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Caller ID Name Display lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the syste
184. e system for any number of rings 0 6 Assigning more rings gives the operator an opportunity to answer calls before they go to the auto attendant VMS Hunt Delay is programmable on a per line basis In addition you can program this feature so that calls can be handled one way during the day and a different way when the system is in Night Service One ring is approximately 5 seconds For immediate call handling set this option to 0 rings 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone ay N ODO wn A U At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to VMS Hunt Delay When highlighted press Select At the Mode prompt enter 1 or 2 for day or night mode respectively At the Line prompt enter the line number for example 01 for line 1 Enter the number of rings 0 to 6 The default is 2 rings e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return
185. e 4c 28 November 2011 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 118 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 PBX Mode Call Routing ARS Selectors 7 2 Call Classes e PBX System Mode Only IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode systems can be installed in either key or PBX system mode This feature is only supported by systems running in PBX system mode The setting is ignored by systems running in key system mode The system has a fixed class of calls set these are Local National International Emergency Cell and Toll Free Each class contains a list of numbers which are used to match outgoing calls to a class and a list of which ARS selectors 114 should be used when a match occurs The Local class is the default matching numbers cannot be set for this class Instead it is the class used when no match occurs against any other class However the ARS selectors used by this class can be edited Each class can contain multiple numbers The numbers only need to be the leading digits of the dialed number not the whole number If an external dialing prefix 12 has been set for the system the prefix is automatically removed and so does not need to be included in the class of call entries 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key
186. e 4c 28 November 2011 Overview DS Phones 1 3 6 3 Centralized Programming Menu The Centralized Programming menu is only shown on the first two extensions in the system The commands in the sub menus allow the users on the first two extensions in the system to program settings for other extensions 12 30 Wed 3 56pm x10 Status Feature Admin tCentralized Programming tTelephone Programming tTAdmin2 Button Programming t DND Exceptions Admin tCentalized Programming t Extension Name Select it t Line Ringing t Personal Speed Dial I t Auto Line Selection I I t System Speed Dial l Centralized Programming Extension Program Extension 12 4 Auto Line Selection Select Back Back e The System Speed Dial option is only shown when the selected extension to program is one of the two first extensions in the system 1 3 6 4 Telephone Programming Menu These commands allow a phone user to change the settings applied to their own extension 12 30 Wed 3 56pm x10 Status Feature Admin See Button Programming 1 System Administration tDND Exceptions l tCentralized Programming t Extension Name Telephone Programming Personal Speed Dial i t Admin2 t System Speed Dial i Admin tTelephone Programming Select Exit Program Extension 10 Button Programming Select Back CC i CC e The System Speed Dial
187. e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 85 on or 85 off 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press i Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure rza e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 01 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Do Not Disturb and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Do Not Disturb e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu
188. e button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 4 Enter the button number for which you want to view the line ringing setting 5 The display will show LINE RINGING and the current ring setting for the line on that button and the line number it represents in the form lt ring setting gt L lt line number gt e I Immediate ring D Delayed ring 5 seconds delay N No ring 6 To change the setting from its current value enter the button number again 7 To view the setting of another line button enter the number of that button IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 201 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 e To exit phone based administration at any time press t
189. e displays Clear Backup Alarm 4 Press Enter to clear the backup alarm e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 123 The phone displays Clear Backup Alarm 4 Press Enter 205 to clear the backup alarm e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 299 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 17 4 Backup the Configuration An automatic system backup occurs between 12 midnight and 1AM every night This copies the contents of the system primary folder on the System SD card over the system backup folder Any files with matching file names will be replaced You can use the procedures below to perform a manual backup You might want to do this if you have just completed a large number of programming changes This process can take approximately 6 minutes e This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone
190. e extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Enter the calling group 18 number for the button 71 to 74 e A page call to the calling group members can be selected by adding a in front of the calling group number 5 The button function is changed to Calling Group followed by the calling group number e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 246 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Calling Group ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 E followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming i
191. e links will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages Warranty Avaya provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty In addition Avaya s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Please note that if you acquired the product from an authorized Avaya reseller outside of the United States and Canada the warranty is provided to you by said Avaya reseller and not by Avaya Licenses THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE HTTP SUPPORT AVAYA COM LICENSEINFO ARE APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS USES AND OR INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER AS APPLICABLE UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING AVAYA DOES NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER AND AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE BY INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO YOU ON BEHALF OF YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY F
192. earance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Enter the target extension number for the button If you want to page the extension put a in front of the number 5 The button function is changed to AD I followed by the target extension number e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 231 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 6 Auto Dial Other This function allows the user to make a call using a number stored by the button The number can be an internal number an external number an account code or any other number The button can then be used when a number of that type needs to be dialed 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b
193. ed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 11 4 At the Call Forwarding Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 5 At the Call Forwarding Dest prompt enter the destination number for the call forwarding calls e To forward to an external number enter the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number 6 The button function is changed to Call Forward O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 237 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 9 Call Pickup This function allows the user to pickup a call alerting at a specified extension Separate buttons can be created for each extension for which call pickup is required e If an extension already has a button set to this function and target creating another button w
194. ee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 313 Ind X pannud apaninap a iene ee 315 Page 4 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 1 Overview IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 5 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview 1 Overview This document covers the programming of an IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode system that can be done from the phones on that system This is only supported from a limited range of phones ETR ETR 18D ETR 34D M Series M7310 M7310N M7324 M7324N T Series T7316E T7316 1400 Series 1408 1416 and 9500 Series 9504 and 9508 The range of programming can be divided into the following categories e System Administration This programming can only be done on the first two extensions in the system It mainly involves settings that affect all extensions on the system e Centralized Programming This programming can only be done on the first two extensions in the system The user is able to select another extension number and then program settings for that other extension e Telephone Programming This programming is done from the extension whose settings are being changed It does not cover daily operations for example switching forwarding on or off System web management can access all the settings covered by telephone administration plus a wide range of additional settings not available through telephone administration However use of system web
195. eeeeseeeeeeeees 154 10 7 Internal Hotline 2 ceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseenteeeeeeees 156 10 8 Outside Conference Denial ceeeseeeeeeeees 158 10 9 Automatic Privacy eee eeieeeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeesneeeen 159 10 10 Do Not Disturb Exceptions 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeees 161 11 Account Codes 11 1 Forced Account Code List ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 165 11 2 Forced Account Code Extensions 0ceeee 167 12 Voicemail 12 1 VMS Cover On Off ecceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeseaeeeeetnaes 171 Page 3 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 12 2 VMS Coverage RINS reenen 173 12 3 Voicemail Password 175 12 4 VMS Hunt Delay ccceesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeee 176 12 5 VMS Hunt Schedule cceccesceceeeeeeeeereeeneeeeneeenees 177 13 Groups 13 1 Calling GroupSis isisisi rnini 181 13 2 Hunt GIOP Sin nan a i RE 183 13 3 Night Service Group eeeeeeerseererrirerrrrerrrnreen 185 13 4 Night Service Button 187 13 5 Pickup GroupS sai sence ei uence 189 13 6 Operator Group eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 191 14 Ring Settings 14 1 Abbreviated Ringing 195 14 2 Call Coverage RINS 197 14 3 Distinctive RINGING eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenneeeee 199 144 LINGARINGING ieie Ueda 201 14 5 Personal Ring Pattern 0 ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 203 14 6 Line Ringing Pattern 204 14 7 Override Line Ringing 206 14 8 Ringing on
196. eft to right bottom to top ie bottom left is button 01 top right is button 22 e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Buttons 03 upwards are assigned as line buttons based on the Number of Lines 73 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system e For systems running in PBX system mode the first two buttons 01 to 02 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 23 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 While being used in any of the programming modes the function of some keys changes as indicated by the overlay template below Next Procedure Ma ltem Remove Prev Prev Procedure ltem Enter _ i CS IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 24 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview ETR Phones 1 4 3 ETR 6D ETR 6 This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone from another extension The ETR 6 is physically similar but lacks a display AMAYA Programmable Buttons Y Message Light AOO USES The button numbering order on the
197. em has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial 68 The button function is changed to Active Line Pickup e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 228 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Active Line Pickup ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At
198. em password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Enter the target extension number for the button If you want to page the extension put a in front of the number 5 The button function is changed to AD I e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 230 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Auto Dial Intercom ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 9 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call app
199. emove Enter Process Item Data 01 Mute IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition SK3 10 22 12 23 14 24 16 25 18 26 20 27 Shift 22 28 24 29 26 30 28 31 30 32 32 33 Page 34 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview BST Phones 1 5 7 M7324 This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system e Additional buttons can be supported on a M7324 phone through the addition of KLM button module 3 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 35 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 IP Office Basic Edition Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Line buttons based on the Number of Lines 73 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system are assigned from buttons 23 downwards and then button 24 upwards For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons
200. ems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition Page 42 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview BST Phones 1 5 13 T7316 This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system e Note that while physically very similar the programmable button numbering order for the T7316 and T7316E phones differ The T7316 is more similar to the M7310 in the order of button numbering IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 43 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Buttons 16 downward are assigned as line buttons starting from the first line based on the Number of Lines 73 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call ap
201. en highlighted press Select 4 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to VMS Hunt Schedule When highlighted press Select 5 At the Line prompt enter the line number for example 01 for line 1 6 Enter the required value 1 to 4 The default is 4 ie no voicemail coverage e 1 Always 2 Day only 3 Night only 4 Never Default e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another line gt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 507 The phone displays VMS Hunt Schedule 4 Enter the line number 5 The current setting is shown in the telephone display 6 Enter the required value e 1 Always 2 Day only 3 Night only 4 Never Default e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous line e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To selec
202. en highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter 1 or 2 e 1 0or1 required before Area Code and Number the default setting e 2 Area Code and Number Only e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 402 The phone displays Toll Call Prefix 4 The current system setting is displayed 5 To change the setting enter the required value e 1 0or1 required before Area Code and Number the default setting e 2 Area Code and Number Only e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 112 IP Office Basic Edition Iss
203. ension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Enter the hunt group 18 number for the button 771 to 776 The additional number 777 can be used for access to voicemail to collect messages e A page call to the hunt group members can be selected by adding a in front of the hunt group number 5 The button function is changed to Hunt Group e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 262 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Hunt Group 16 21 Idle Line Pickup This function allows the user to seize a line if that line is idle This allows the user to access line for which they do not have a line appearance button on their extension e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press a call appearance button and then dial 8 followed by the two digit line number 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on w
204. ension can also forward calls to external numbers e System Password 11h When this optional password is set users must enter it to turn Night Service 18 on off Also when night service is on users in the Night Service Group 18 must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to emergency phone numbers 10 amp and marked system speed dials 13A e Toll Call Prefix 11 gt Use this feature to indicate whether users must dial a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls before the area code to make a long distance call or just the area code and number IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 55 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 2 1 2 Incoming Call Routing Key System Mode For an incoming external call on a line the following options control where the call is presented e Coverage Destination The Coverage Destination setting of each line can be used to select whether an incoming call on that line is also presented to one of the following options in addition to alerting on any matching line appearances e For PRI trunks it is not possible to know on which of the trunk s channels incoming calls will arrive Therefore in most cases the coverage destination and other settings of each line on the trunk should be set to the same values e Coverage Extension The call alerts on an intercom or call appearance button of a selected line coverage extension The
205. ent workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours e You must program a Night Service Button on the first extension on the system e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation e If you reassign the Night Service Button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned e If you program a System Password 11 you must enter the password when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 104 and marked system speed dial numbers without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours e If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule 213 determines when outside calls should ring voicemail The status of the Night Service Button tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode e The Night Service Button returns to the status on off it was in immediately prior to a power failure or to System Reset 307 being used e Night Service is unavailable on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing D
206. enter the line number For systems running in PBX mode the number of an ARS selector 65 to 99 can also be entered The current setting is displayed 6 The current setting is displayed e 1 Assigned The line is already assigned to a button on the extension Changing the setting to not assigned will remove the line from the line appearance e 2 Not assigned The line is not assigned to a button on the extension Changing the setting to assigned will add the line to the next button after lines already assigned to buttons on the extension 7 Enter 1 or 2 If assigning a line it is automatically assigned to the next non line button after the intercom or call appearance buttons 8 To assign the line to a particular button press 3 and enter the button number of press the button required This will change any current button assignment of that line e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 76 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Line Settings Line Assignment 4 3 Line Coverage Extension When an incoming call arrives on a line it is presented to all extensions that have a line appearance button assigned 754 for that line However for call coverage VMS coverage and call forwarding it can be set to follow the settings of the extension set below as the
207. ept for calls from numbers in the user s do not disturb exceptions list e Locking the phone overrides call screening e Manual call recording cannot be applied to a call being screened e While a call is being screened it uses one of the available voicemail channels If no voicemail channels are available call screening does not occur e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 248 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Call Screening e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Any call currently being screened will continue being screened but further calls will not receive screening e Direct Line Pickup can be used to answer a call that is being screened 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select 3 At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure 4 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming
208. er 2011 Extension Settings Automatic Privacy 10 10 Do Not Disturb Exceptions When a user has do not disturb 256 enabled calls to them go directly to voicemail or receive busy if voicemail is not available Do not disturb exceptions can be used to set numbers that are still able to call the user even when they have do not disturb enabled The numbers can be internal and external numbers You can configure up to 20 do not disturb exception numbers for each user The numbers can include wildcards A X character is displayed for a match any digit wildcard An N is displayed for a match any digits wildcard 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the d up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press 7 Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the d up or down arrow butt
209. er extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial 70 5 The button function is changed to Loudspeaker Page e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 267 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by t
210. ess Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Set Locale When highlighted press Select 5 Use the up or down arrow buttons to change the setting until the require locale is displayed e The possible locales are Canada Mexico and United States 6 Press Select to use the currently displayed locale 7 The phone will prompt for an Immediate Reboot Press Confirm to reboot the system and use the new locale setting gt e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Use the Next Process key to select Set Locale 4 Use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting e The possible locales are Canada Mexico and United States 5 Press Enter to use the currently displayed locale 6 The phone will prompt for an Immediate Reboot Press Enter to reboot the system and use the new locale setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button
211. ess Enter To enter a wildcard digit press HOLD Press Clear to remove the existing number 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the other numbers in the list e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 409 The phone will display FrcdActCd Lst 4 Select a list entry 01 to 99 5 Enter up to six digits for the list entry If the account code is five digits or less you must press Enter to save the account code in memory To enter a wildcard digit press HOLD 6 Do one of the following e To enter other account codes press Next Item to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 5 and 6 e To change the account code you just entered press Remove and repeat Steps 5 and 6 e To delete the account code you just entered press Remove e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 165 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either
212. ess of the setting for this feature 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Distinctive Ring When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 1 active ie use different distinctive ringing patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system ha
213. essing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 935 4 The button function is changed to Hot Dial e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 258 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Hot Dial ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the exte
214. etion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other protective rights of Avaya or others All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements 2011 Avaya Inc All rights reserved IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 320 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011
215. etting is ignored by systems running in PBX system mode 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Number of Lines When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter two digits for the number of lines e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 104 4 Enter two digits for the number of
216. eturn Rings 14 10 Transfer Return Extension This option is new for IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher This settings can be used to change the destination for an extension s transfer return calls 20 The existing extension setting Transfer Return Rings 20 sets whether and when calls transferred by an extension return to it The Transfer Return Extension setting allows such calls to be redirected Note that if a door phone or paging extension is selected the call will continue ringing at the transfer destination rather than returning When a call is routed to an extension by transfer return it alerts with the Transfer Return ringing pattern The display indicates both the transferred caller s details and the original transfer destination If a phantom extension door extension or paging extension is set as the transfer return destination transferred calls will not follow transfer return and instead will continue ringing at the transfer destination Calls transferred by an auto attendant are not subject to transfer return When the transfer return extension has no available intercom buttons the call will continue to alert at the original transfer destination until the transfer return extension becomes available at which time the transfer return will occur This also applies for a busy analog extension or an extension in programming mode When an external call follows transfer return and there is a line appearance for
217. etwork Time Synchronization Network time synchronization lets you synchronize the telephone system time and date with the network time information that your service provider includes on calls that include caller ID If network time synchronization is not selected the system time has to be set manually 9A If network time synchronization is set to Active and your service provider sends Caller ID from another time zone the system clock will not match your local time Note that this feature uses the first analog trunk on the card installed in slot 1 of the system control unit 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 5 6 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Network Time Synch When highlighted press Select The current setting is displayed Press either 1 to display Active the default setting or
218. extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 9 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial 8 5 The button function is changed to Idle Line Pickup followed by the hunt group number e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 264 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Idle Line Pickup 16 22 Last Number Redial This function allows the user to redial the last external number dialed e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button progr
219. extension in the system 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I4 SPEAKER MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to VMS Hunt Schedule When highlighted press Select 5 At the Line prompt enter the line number for example 01 for line 1 6 Enter the required value 1 to 4 The default is 4 ie no voicemail coverage e 1 Always 2 Day only 3 Night only 4 Never Default e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another line lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is req
220. f a call is transferred to an extension which is the transfer return destination for the transferring extension the call remains ringing at the transfer destination Transfer return calls ignore Do Not Disturb call forwarding call coverage and coverage to voicemail Transfer return calls that are answered at the return extension are not logged even if the Called ID log answered calls is set to Active IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 209 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin Azo e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Transfer Return When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter the number of rings O off to 9 Alternatively use the left or right arrow icons to toggle the settings or
221. f the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the 14 SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auxiliary Equipment When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Contact Close Grp When highlighted press Select At the Group prompt enter 1 or 2 for the contact closure group you want to adjust At the Extension prompt enter the extension number whose group membership you want to change The extension s current group membership is shown Press 1 Assigned or 2 Not assigned to change the extension s membership The default is 2 Not assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 2
222. f the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 936 4 The button function is changed to Station Lock e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 283 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the b
223. fice Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 184 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Groups Hunt Groups 13 3 Night Service Group When night service is on and a call comes in all available extensions in the night service group ring immediately regardless of the line ringing settings Any extensions that would normally ring during the day also ring Do not include extensions connected to certain auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems internal or external hotline telephones or doorphones in the Night Service Group A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it comes in on a line that is assigned to that user s telephone Line assignments for extensions in the Night Service Group can vary from one extension to another If you program a System Password 11h when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 105 and Marked System Speed Dial numbers without entering the System Password If you have a voice messaging system lines that are assigned to the user s telephones in the Night Service Group are covered by the voice messaging system depending on the status of VMS Hunt Delay 176 and VMS Hunt Schedule 213 Night Service is ignored on T1 lines with DID 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 N ODO wo A U At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin
224. followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 733 The display will show Select Memory Card 4 Enter 1 for the System SD card or 2 for the Optional SD card e If the selected card is current running the option Immediate Shutdown is displayed To start the process press the Enter button otherwise press The status will change to Shutting Down and then Shut Down Check that the LED for that card slot is extinguished before removing the card e If the selected card has been shut down the option Start Up is displayed To start the process press the Enter button otherwise press The status will change to Starting Up and then Started Up e If the selected card is not present the message No Card is displayed e If the selected card is currently performing another process which should not be interrupted System Busy is displayed IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 312 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance Memory Card Startup Shutdown 17 12 Display System Details The following commands can be used from any DS extension with a suitable display They allow the extension user to report basic information that may be required to initiate problem diagnosis To display system details 1 Press Feature and dial one of the following codes Information DS Phones BST Phones Description E
225. g When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 28 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Absent Message and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Absent Message e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A gt Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt ente
226. g a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either the first intercom or call appearance button or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Pickup Group and press Select 4 At the Endpoint prompt enter the pickup group 18 number for the button 661 to 664 5 The button function is changed to Pickup Group followed by the pickup group number e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up
227. g mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 282 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Simultaneous Page 16 31 Station Lock This function allows the user to lock their extension from being used to make calls After they press the button they are prompted to enter a four digit code after which the extension is locked If the extension is already locked pressing the button prompts for reentry of the four digit code to unlock the extension e Any locked extension can be unlocked from either of the first two extensions in the system without needing the four digit locking code using a Station Unlock 28 button e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 21 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 936 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons
228. ge 89 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 5 Date and Time The following processes can be used to set and change the system date and time e Change the System Date 9 Set the date displayed on phones and used by the system e Change the System Time 924 Set the time displayed on phones and used by the system e Network Time Synchronization 935 Instead of manually setting the date and time use the information provided by the service provider on calls with incoming caller ID to automatically update the system date and time e Automatic Daylight Savings Time 9 Set the system to automatically adjust the system date and time to match daylight saving changes IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 90 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Date and Time 5 1 Changing the Date The date held by the system and shown on display telephones can be changed This should only be set on a system not using Network Time Synchronization 934 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administrat
229. ging e Alternatively use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 305 The phone displays Abbreviated Ringing 4 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 1 active ie use abbreviated ringing e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 195 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the
230. gned the default setting e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required gt e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 316 The phone displays Call Waiting 4 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter the required value The default is 2 not active ie no call waiting e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 150 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Extension Settings Call Wa
231. gramming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone ii 2 3 4 5 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 325 The display shows Reset VM Pwd At the Extension prompt enter the two digit number of the extension Press Enter To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 325 The display shows Reset Voice Mail Pwd At the Extension prompt enter the two digit number of the extension Press Enter Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 175 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 12 4 VMS Hunt Delay Use this feature to determine when outside calls should be answered by the voicemail auto attendant You can set th
232. hange the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 172 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Voicemail VMS Cover On Off 12 2 VMS Coverage Rings You can program the number of times that an extension will ring before the call goes to voicemail e If an extension has call coverage and voicemail active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of call coverage rings e If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings e If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voicemail e One ring is approximately 5 seconds e For IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher the option O for immediate voicemail is available 0 is the only value useable for phantom extensions If selected it has the following effects e For a call that would have otherwise have alerted at the extension the call now goes immediately to voicemail e If the extension has call forwarding set the forwarded call will continue ringing a
233. he ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the if SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Restrictions Permissions When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Set System Password When highlighted press Select 5 Enter the new four digit system password Use Default to return to the default setting of no password e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 403 The phone displays Set System Password 4 Enter a four digit password e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system pres
234. he Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 6 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 7 At the Button prompt enter from 03 to 99 to select the line button for which you want to view the line ringing setting 8 The display will show LINE RINGING and the current ring setting for the line on that button and the line number it represents in the form lt ring setting gt L lt line number gt e I Immediate ring D Delayed ring 5 seconds delay N No ring 8 To change the setting from its current value enter the button number again 9 To view the se
235. he system press 4 Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 4 4 At the Fwd Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 5 At the Fwd Dest prompt enter the destination number for the call forwarding calls e To forward to an external number enter the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number 6 The button function is changed to Fwd O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 follow
236. he system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Intercom Dial Tone When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter 1 regular or 2 machine The default is 2 regular ie normal dial tone e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 309 The phone displays Intercom Dial Tone
237. he voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode e The Night Service Button returns to the status on off it was in immediately prior to a power failure or to System Reset 307 being used e Night Service is unavailable on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 60 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Telephony Features Night Service 2 5 Phantom Extensions For IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher extension users are created in the system configuration for all possible users regardless of whether they are matched by installed extension ports Those user extensions without a physical port are referred to as phantom extensions The main purpose of phantom extensions is to provide voicemail mailboxes that are not associated with an existing physical extension These mailboxes can be accessed and used by the auto attendant menus and other functions e The system assumes that the base control unit is always fully populated with up to 24 extensions either real or phantom or a mix to which it assigns extension numbers in sequence It does this before assigning extension numbers to any real extensions on attached external expansion modules up to the system extension limit If the system extension limit has not been exceeded any remaining extension numbers are assigned to additional phantom extensions The system web managemen
238. hen using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 399 The display will show Copy Settings 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension from which you want to copy the settings 5 At the next Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to which you want to transfer the copy 6 If Proceed is not displayed or there is a problem additional text messages may be displayed e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 399 The phone displays Copy Settings 4 At the Extension prompt enter the source extension to copy from 5 At the next Extension prompt enter the target extens
239. hese are used for making internal and external calls Line appearance buttons can still be used if required e Line Buttons These buttons used as line appearance buttons for external phone lines into the system These can only be programmed by a system administrator using the Number of Lines 73 and Line Assignment 75 gt functions They cannot be overridden by the extension user e Other Buttons Any additional buttons can be used for range of functions listed in Button Programming Functions 22h These buttons can be programmed by the system administrator and for some functions the extension user IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 10 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview Programmable Buttons 1 3 DS Phones This covers the 1400 Series and 9500 Series phones supported by the IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode system 1400 Series Phones 9500 Series Phones All these phones can be used for programming except the 1403 The phones enter the various programming modes through admin menus 174 displayed on the phone These menus are accessed by pressing the Admin display soft key The menus are dynamically adjusted depend on whether the phone is connected to one of the first two extensions or not To access the administration menus during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone adminis
240. hether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 15 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to VMS Cover and press Select 4 The button function is changed to VMS Cover gt e Exit programming by pressing aSa PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of
241. hether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press i Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either press the first intercom or call appearance button or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Idle Line Pickup and press Select 4 At the Endpoint prompt enter 8 5 The button function is changed to Idle Line Pickup followed by the hunt group number lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N
242. highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Operator Group 5 When highlighted press Select 6 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number whose group membership you want to change 7 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required gt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 191 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 14 Ring Settings IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 193 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 14 Ring Settings You can program extensions to ring in different ways e Abbreviated Ringing 195 When you are on a call any incoming call rings only once e Call Coverage Rings 19 You can define the number of times that calls on a line assigned to your extension ring before they are sent to the covering extension
243. hones 1 5 11 T7100 This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone from another extension Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons Feature 04 N re oun OQU Volume IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 41 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 5 12 T7208 This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone from another extension Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons 1 2 4 5 7 8 0 Volume Mute Feature A W Headset 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Mute e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Line buttons based on the Number of Lines 7 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system are assigned from buttons 07 downwards and then button 08 upwards e For syst
244. ial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 181 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 502 The phone displays Calling Group At the Group prompt enter a group number At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed O N UU N Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 8 Do one of the following e To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 6 e To program another group press Next Procedure 20 Prev Procedure 204 and enter a new group number Then repeat Steps 5 and 6 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 182 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Groups Calling Groups 13 2 Hunt Groups For extensions in a hunt group an incoming call
245. ic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration e Basic Edition Page 95 IP Office Bas Issue 4c 28 November 2011 6 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions You can restrict outside calling from an extension that has access to an outside line WARNING While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed e Allowed Phone Number Lists 9 Used to specify telephone numbers that extensions associated with the list can dial regardless of other dialing restrictions e Allowed List Assignments 995 Used to assign which allowed number lists an extension can use e Disallowed Phone Number Lists 10 Used to specify telephone numbers that extensions associated with the list cannot dial e Disallowed List Assignments 10 Used to assign up to which disallowed number lists are applied to an extension e Emergency Phone Number List 105 Used to create a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all extensions can dial regardless of dialing restrictions e Outgoing Call Restriction 10 Use this feature to specify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension e Allow Remote Call Forwarding 10 All extensions can forward their incoming calls to another extension using call forwarding 236 This option is used to configure whether the extension can also forward calls to external numbers e System Password 11 When this optional password is set
246. ighted press Select 5 At the Group prompt enter the list entry you want to change by entering 01 to 10 6 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 7 The current setting is displayed 8 Enter 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 9 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another line to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 80 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Line Settings Group Call Distribution M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 206 The phone displays Group Call Distrib 4 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 to 6 5 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 6 Enter 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at
247. igned or alerting the user as part of a hunt group e There are number of methods for a user to switch their VMS Cover setting on or off through their mailbox through the phone menus or using a VMS Cover 28 button e A VMS Transfer 28 button can be configured to let a user transfer calls directly to the mailbox of other users When Do Calls Go to an Auto Attendant The IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode voicemail supports the configuration of up to 9 auto attendant services to answer and redirect calls If an auto attendant has been configured it can be used to answer calls as follows e Immediate Auto Attendant Service One of the auto attendants can be specified as the Coverage Destination for a particular line The call is presented immediately to that auto attendant e Delayed Optional Auto Attendant Service The VMS Schedule setting of each line can be used to set whether unanswered calls should go to a selected auto attendant The settings can be enabled for day service night service 27 both or never the default The delay used before going to the auto attendant is set by the line s VMS Delay Day and VMS Delay Night settings as appropriate IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 59 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 2 4 Night Service Use this feature to program a button on the first extension on the system to turn night service on and off When night service is on
248. includes an LEDs LCD it will indicate when VMS cover is on or off e This setting is ignored for any extension configured as a loudspeaker paging extension 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the if SPEAKER MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Automatic VMS Cover When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 1 active ie voicemail coverage on e 1 Active Assigned the default e 2 Not active Not assigned 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the
249. ine Assignment 754 programming e For an extension assigned as a doorphone extension 12 automatic line selection is automatically set to select intercom or call appearance buttons first 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select 3 At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auto Line Selection When highlighted press Select 5 Enter a two digit button number to indicate the line intercom or call appearance button that you want added to the extension user s automatic line selection list 6 Repeat the process in steps 5 to add further buttons to the list e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At a system administration extension the first two extensions on the system press A Feature user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the passw
250. ine appearance 54 65 Programmable 54 65 Cc Call appearance buttons 54 65 Call Coverage 234 Call Coverage Rings 197 Call Distribution Group 80 Index Call Forwarding 109 236 Call Pickup 238 Call Prefix 112 Call Restriction 107 Call Waiting 150 Caller ID Inspect Button 240 Log 145 Name Display Button 244 Time Synchronization 93 Caller ID Log 242 Calling Group 181 Button 246 Calls External 54 65 Internal 54 65 Canadian 69 148 Cantonese 69 148 Clearing a Backup Alarm 299 CO Disconnect Time 82 Collect Voicemail 260 Conference Denial 158 Conference Drop 250 Contact Closure 127 Button 252 254 Group 128 Operation 130 Copy Extension Settings 295 System Software 304 Coverage Call Coverage Button 234 Line Coverage Extension 77 Coverage Rings 173 197 D Danish 69 148 Date Network Time Synchronization 93 System Date 91 Daylight Saving 94 Default 306 Delay VMS Hunt Delay 176 Delayed ring 201 Denial 158 Dial Tone Intercom 152 Disallowed Numbers List 101 List Assignment 103 Disconnect Time 82 Display Language 148 Distinctive Ringing 199 Do Not Disturb Button 256 Doorphone 122 Alert Extension 125 Extension 123 Drop 250 DST 94 Dutch 69 148 E Emergency Phone Numbers 105 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 315 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR Overlay 20 Extension Caller ID Logging 145 Copy Settings 295 Doorphone 123 Doo
251. ing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 119 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 7 3 External Dialing Prefix e PBX System Mode Only IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode systems can be installed in either key or PBX system mode This feature is only supported by systems running in PBX system mode The setting is ignored by systems running in key system mode This option sets the digit which when dialed as the first digit indicates that the call is intended to be external and should be routed by comparing the remaining dialed digits against the call out settings 11 The default setting depends on the system locale 6 9 is the default setting for systems with the Locale setting of United States 0 is the default setting for systems with the Locale setting Germany All other locales default to no external dialing prefix 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER 4 MUTE and J HEADSET buttons still
252. inistration are the 1408 1416 9504 and 9508 These phones can still after having selected a function move between functions using the appropriate codes 84 1 3 6 1 System Administration Menu The System Administration menu is only shown on the first two extensions in the system 1 System Date t System Time t Number of Lines t Transfer Return l 12 30 Wed 3 56pm x10 t Recall Timer Duration t Outside Conf Denial Feature Admin t Wake Up Service Button t Ringing on Transfer T e E 1 a iclear Backup Aam 1 Line Assignment i System Administration eee eee ee t Automatic Ext Privacy Centralized Programming I t Abbreviated Ringing tTelephone Programming Network Time Synch iS E t Set Li le tTransfer Return Ext tAdmin2 I oca le 3 t Set Language t Forced Account Code Admin tUnsup Disconnect Distinctive Ring 4 System Administration t 2 tintercom Dial Tone Select System Parameters t Automatic VMS Cover 1 System Date Select Back tCall Waiting tLog ID All Calls Ext1 tLog ID All Calls Ext2 System Parameters 47 eee 1 I 1 I I 1 1 1 External Hotline l I I 1 1 1 1 i I 1 SS an en an an an an eee ee See aD aD an an an i tLines Co Disconnect Time tLog ID All Calls Exts tExtensions t Group Call Distribution tCall Coverage Rings tRestriction
253. ion Issue 4c 28 November 2011 4 Line Settings When you initially set your system up you can use the feature Number of Lines 734 to determine the number of outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions e Number of Lines 735 Set the number of lines automatically assigned to line appearance buttons on all extensions with programmable buttons The lines are also used as the default automatic line selection list for those extensions e Line Assignment 755 Allows the individual setting of additional lines to line appearance buttons beyond those set by the Number of Lines 735 setting e Line Coverage Extension 774 When an incoming calls arrives on a line it is presented to all extensions that have a line appearance button assigned for that line However for call coverage VMS coverage and call forwarding it can be set to follow the settings of the extension set as the line s coverage extension This does not apply if the line is assigned to ring into the operator group a hunt group or a calling group e Group Call Distribution 8 Assign outside lines to hunt group Doing this allows outside calls to ring directly into a hunt group instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist e CO Disconnect Time 82 gt Set the disconnect time setting for a line e Automatic Line Selection 84 Adjust the automatic line selection settings for an extension Assign Line to Auto Attendant 7 By defaul
254. ion When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Date When highlighted press Select 5 Enter the new system date in the format MMDDYY using the dial pad For example 120409 is the date December 4th 2009 e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 101 The phone will display System Date 4 Enter the new system date in the format MMDDYY using the dial pad For example 120409 would be used to enter the date December 4th 2009 e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 101 The phone will di
255. ion prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the Il SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 03 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Recall and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Recall lt e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or Ja At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To sele
256. ion Page 152 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Extension Settings Intercom Dial Tone IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 153 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 10 6 External Hotline Use this feature to identify an extension as being an external hotline extension When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline extension a stored external number is automatically dialed The external number might be for example a frequently called service bureau The external hotline must be a single line telephone without a dial pad Under certain conditions of heavy telephone usage the external hotline may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately for example if many of the tip ring devices connected to your system dial out at the same time You can identify several extensions as external hotlines Do not assign an external hotline to either of the first two extensions in the system Use Hotline 15 to identify an internal hotline extension Use Line Assignment 755 to assign outside lines to the external hotline extension and Automatic Line Selection 844 to set the extension to select outside lines first If your use of the external hotline requires immediate dialing of the programmed number assign a line for use only by this extension Set line ringing 204 to no ring for all lines assigned to the external hotline to prevent incoming calls from ringing at
257. ion to copy to Any extension except the source extension is valid e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 399 The phone displays Copy Settings At the Extension prompt enter the source extension to copy from wu BB W N At the next Extension prompt enter the target extension to copy to Any extension except the source extension is valid Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 295 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 17 2 Remote Administration Password This password is used for system administration by the Administrator account using IP Office Manager or IP Office Web Manager It is also used for connection to the system by the System Status Application and System Monitor application e This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the syste
258. iple 9 auto attendants By default all lines are assigned to the first auto attendant The Assign Line to AA settings allows this settings to be adjusted to select a different auto attendant The individual auto attendants are configured through system web management They cannot be configured through the phone base administration menus 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Lines When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Assign Line to AA When highlighted press Select 5 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter the auto attendant number 1 to 9 The default is no auto attendant e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another line t
259. irst two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 404 The phone displays Disallowed Lists At the List Number prompt enter a list number 1 to 8 At the Entry prompt select a list entry 01 to 10 O N U N Enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory press Enter Do one of the following e To delete the telephone number you just entered press Remove e To add other telephone numbers to this list press Next Item and repeat Steps 6 and 7 e To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and go to Step 5 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 102 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Disallowed Number Lists 6 4 Disallowed List Assignment Use this feature to assign which disallowed number lists 10 an extension can use 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER 4 MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons
260. is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password i b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 Select a speed dial by pressing Feature and dialing four digits between 480 to 499 If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display 3 To enter a number dial the digits For example to program 555 4757 press 5554757 Any existing number is overwritten To remove any digits press Hold Function Press to insert Character Description Soft Key 1 OO P O Inserts a 1 5 second pause IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 139 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Soft Key 2 R Send a hook switch flash signal 4 To save the number press Feature e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 140 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Speed Dials Personal Speed Dials ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown
261. isplay Def Num 4 Press 1 to select 2 digit numbering 2 to select 3 digit numbering 5 The phone displays Immediate Reboot Press either Enter to reboot the system or Remove to cancel without rebooting Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 66 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Changes System Numbering 3 3 System Locale The system locale setting affects a range of trunk settings relating to ring tones and other signals Wherever possible the locale should be set to match the actual location of the system e WARNING This process will restart the phone system and disconnect all currently connected calls e Changing the system locale will change the system language 6 to the default for the selected locale Any user display language l14 settings are also reset to match the system language 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted pr
262. isplays Automatic Ext Privacy 4 At the Extension prompt enter the two digit number of the extension 5 Press either 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 159 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 304 The phone displays Automatic Ext Privacy 4 At the Extension prompt enter the two digit number of the extension 5 Press either 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 160 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 Novemb
263. isplays Disallow To Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 to 8 nan uu A U N Enter the required value The default is 2 not active ie the extension is not associated with the selected list e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 8 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous list respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 100 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Allowed List Assignment 6 3 Disallowed Number Lists A disallowed numbers lists specifies telephone numbers that extensions associated with the list 10 cannot dial You can create up to eight disallowed number lists each containing up to 10 telephone numbers For example you may want to prevent calls to a specific telephone number or to categories of numbers such as international numbers A Disallowed Phone Number can be up to 12 digits long and may include 0 9 or a wildcard character to represent any digit Numbers in a disallowed list are overridden by allowed numbers 974 emergency numbers 10
264. istration is shown on the display 3 Dial 303 The phone displays Display Language 4 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number that you want to set the language for The current display language is shown 5 Use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting Press Remove to return to the default for the system this will vary depending on the system locale setting 674 e The possible language options available are English French and Spanish e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 149 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 10 4 Call Waiting Use this feature to activate call waiting When you are on a call and a second intercom transferred or outside call comes in you hear a beep to indicate you have a second call waiting to be answered Press the switch hook or Recall or Flash button if available to put the current call on hold and retrieve the second call To return to the first call press the switch hook again e This feature is distinct from the local telephone company s Call Waiting feature If you use this system feature do not use your local telephone company s Call Waiting feature
265. it programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 232 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Auto Dial Other M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password i b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Press the Intercom 2 button 4 Enter the number for calls made using the button The number can include and and the following special characters Function Press to insert Character Description Pause Soft Key 1 O P Inserts a 1 5 second pause Soft Key 2 R Send a hook switch flash signal 5 The button function is changed to AD
266. it programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone This process cannot be done using this type of phone IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 65 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 3 2 System Numbering IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode systems can be configured to use either a 2 digit or 3 digit numbering for user extensions e If 2 digit numbering is selected the extensions are numbered 10 to 57 This numbering cannot be changed In 2 digit mode only 48 extensions are supported e If 3 digit numbering is selected the extensions are numbered from 100 upwards This numbering can be changed in the range 100 to 579 using system web management In 3 digit mode a maximum of 100 extensions are supported e In both cases those extensions not matched by physical ports are automatically assigned as phantom extensions fet e WARNING This process will restart the phone system and disconnect all currently connected calls e This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to dis
267. ith this function to the same target will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and dial 6 followed by the extension number 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press i Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either press the first intercom or call appearance button or use the up or down arrow bu
268. iting ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 316 The phone displays Call Waiting Enter the number of the extension to be programmed uu BR U N Enter the required value The default is 2 not active ie no call waiting e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 151 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 10 5 Intercom Dial Tone Use this feature to determine the type of dial tone the system provides at an extension It may be necessary to change this setting for any autodialing device such as a fax or modem that has trouble making calls For example if you have a modem that checks for outside line dial tone before dialing use this procedure to change from Regular to Machine dial tone 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on t
269. ition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Saved Number Redial 16 30 Simultaneous Page This function allows the user to make a page call to both the loudspeaker extension 13A and the extensions in first calling group 18h 71 e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and dial 70 e This type of button can be used for one touch transfer 624 operation 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure ro e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER
270. ively use the left or right arrow icons to toggle the settings or Default to return to the default setting 20 500msec e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Enter two digits between 01 and 80 01 is 25 milliseconds and 80 is 2000 milliseconds Each number from 01 to 80 increases the timer by 25 milliseconds Upon entry of the 2nd digit the recall timer is updated The default is 20 500 milliseconds e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 107 The phone will display Recall Timer Duration 4 Enter two digits between 01 and 80 01 is 25 milliseconds and 80 is 2000 milliseconds Each number from 01 to
271. l only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 04 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Saved Number Redial and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Saved Number Redial e Exit programming by pressing acta PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 67 4 The button function is changed t
272. l only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 11 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Forwarding and press Select 4 At the Call Forwarding Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 5 At the Call Forwarding Dest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls e To forward to an external number enter the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number 6 The button function is changed to Call Forward O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 236 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Call Forwarding M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A gt Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on t
273. layed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial 70 5 The button function is changed to Simultaneous Page e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 281 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 9 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial 70 5 The button function is changed to Simultaneous Page e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programmin
274. ldcard is shown as an X e To enter a multiple digit wildcard press the Transfer key The wildcard is shown as an N e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 162 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 11 Account Codes IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 163 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 11 Account Codes When you set up account codes 1 on the system users at extensions set to Forced Account Code Entry 16 must enter an account code before they can dial outside calls Other extensions can also use account codes but on a voluntary basis They can enter When an account code is entered during a call the caller on the other end does not hear the touch tone digits dialed If SMDR is used the account code assigned to a call is included in the SMDR record for that call You can program the Account Code Entry 226 button on a phone Use a button with LEDs LCD For faster entry of frequently used account codes you can program an account code on an Auto Dial 232 button or as a system speed dial 13 or personal speed dial 138 number but not as a marked system speed dial number IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 164 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c
275. lert extension can be any type of telephone or it can be the loudspeaker paging system so the hotline telephone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker For example a supermarket installs a hotline telephone at its meat counter When a customer uses the hotline telephone the butcher s telephone rings If the loudspeaker paging system is programmed as the alert extension a sales clerk could request a price check over the loudspeaker simply by lifting the handset of the hotline telephone e The same extension cannot be assigned as an internal hotline extension 15 and a door phone extension Assigning a door phone extension as an internal hotline extension cancels the door phone setting e You should not assign hotline telephones to either of the first two extensions in the system e The hotline telephone can receive transferred calls but the user at that extension should not pick up the handset until the telephone rings e To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the hotline telephone use Line Assignment 75 to remove all outside lines e Set Automatic Line Selection 84 for the hotline extension to intercom only e Remove hotline extensions from Night Service Group Extensions 185 Calling Group Extensions and 18h Hunt Group Extensions 18 e Use External Hotline 15A to identify an extension that automatically dials a programmed outside number when a user lifts the handset 1408 1416 9504 9
276. line buttons starting from the first line based on the Number of Lines 73 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons Administration Mode Buttons The diagram below indicates the button functions during phone based administration processes lt Process gt IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 46 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview BST Phones 1 5 15 T7316E KEM Module This type of button module can be used with the T7316EI 484 phones to provide 24 additional programmable buttons Up to 4 modules can be added Security Mail room f Health Center 01 13 02 14 03 15 04 16 05 17 06 18 07 19 08 20 09 21 10 22 11 23 12 24 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration gt Page47 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 5 16 T7406 T7406E This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone from another extension Button Numbering programmable buttons Display SK1i SK2 09 08 07 On Hook A gt Spkr N Ff Oo eau N The double digit numbers are the butto
277. line s coverage extension This does not apply if the line is assigned to ring into the operator group a hunt group or a calling group 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Lines When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Line Coverage Extension When highlighted press Select At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 At the Extension prompt enter the covering extension for the line Use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle through the extensions Press Clear to remove to setting Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another line to adjust if required Exit programming by pressing acta PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 2 3 4 5 At either of the first two extensions on the system
278. ll alerting on a particular line Dial 68 followed by the line number Loudspeaker 70 Makes a call to the extension configured as the system s Loudspeaker Paging extension Calling Group Group calling Dial 7 followed by the calling group number 1 to 4 set to PBX System O oe Breer eeo o omen ARS Selector Seize an available trunk in the ARS selector group 65 to 99 This is supported only on systems with their System Mode set to PBX System Key System Start an outgoing external call without first selecting a line appearance button The line used is automatically selected Automatic Line Selection 845 PBX System Optional external dialing prefix 12 The use of 9 can be removed or swapped with 0 the operator number Prefix in front of an internal number will attempt to make an intercom voice signal call where the caller can speak over the destination s phone speaker If the destination cannot auto answer the call becomes a normal call Simultaneous Page 70 Make a page call to both the users in Calling Group 1 and to the extension configured as the system s Loudspeaker Paging extension IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 57 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Auto Attendant Numbers Dialing the appropriate number shown in the table below allows recording and playback of the matching auto attendant prompt It is important to remember that callers always hear two prom
279. ll appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 14 The button function is changed to Voice Mailbox Transfer e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 290 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Voice Mailbox Transfer 16 35 Wake Up Service A Wake Up Service button can be assigned for the first extension on the system Using this button the extension user can set wake up calls within the next 24 hours period for any other extension e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones it is assigned the first button after any line appearances For BST phones is it assigned to the first button after any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on
280. ll the display to Restrictions Permissions When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Emergency List When highlighted press Select At the Entry prompt enter the list entry you want to change by entering 01 to 10 The current setting is displayed Enter the new number and press Enter Alternatively press Clear to remove the existing number Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the other numbers in the list Exit programming by pressing ace PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 406 The phone displays Emergency List Select a list entry 01 to 10 Enter the telephone number Press Remove to remove any current number Save the telephone number by pressing Enter Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous number entry To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Pho
281. lowing method is used to enter telephone programming mode This mode can be used on any extension a At the phone press Feature 00 b Program Extension is shown on the display IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 20 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview ETR Phones 1 4 1 ETR 34D ETR 34 This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system The ETR 34 is physically similar but lacks a display and so cannot be used for programming Programmable Buttons 4 without lights Programmable Buttons 34 with lights aq FN ZN a bar LOLS The button numbering order on these phones does not depend on the system mode However the default button usage is affected by the system mode gt a SN baa e The programmable buttons are numbered from 01 left to right bottom to top ie bottom left is button 01 top right is button 34 e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Buttons 03 upwards are assigned as line buttons based on the Number of Lines 734 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system e For systems running in PBX
282. m or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 124 The display will show System Manual Backup Press Enter 20 gt to start the backup The display will show Backup in Progress If the backup was successful the telephone display will show the message Backup Successful an un A U N If a backup fails the telephone display will give the reason why the backup was unsuccessful e Shutdown and Insert Card No card was detected in the phone system s System SD card slot For correct operation of the phone system the Avaya SD card should always be present at all times e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested e Backup Failed This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the backup or the card has become corrupted e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle e If you exit the procedure before the backup has finished the backup will continue but no feedback will be displayed IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 301 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 17 5 Restore the Configuration You can restore a previous backup 30 by copying a configuration file from a card in the Optional S
283. m press Admin a e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 730 4 If a system password 11h has been set for the system you will be prompted to enter that password before you can proceed 5 The display will show Remote password e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed On 9500 Series phones accented versions of the characters are also shown If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cursor will move onto the next space e The first character and the first character after a space are automatically capitalized e Use the left and right arrows keys to move the cursor e Do not use punctuation characters such as _ and in the password Note that the password is case sensitive and must be unique 4 Use the dial pad to enter a password of up to 8 characters When completed press Enter To remove the characters entered so far press Clear e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensio
284. m has a system password 114 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 933 4 The button function is changed to Caller ID Name e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 244 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Caller ID Name Display ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the
285. mail This requires the user to have both voicemail coverage and call screening enabled and the phone s ringer not set to silent However it is not applied if the user transfers the call to voicemail e Itis only applied if the user s phone is idle that is not on a call or with a call held pending transfer or conference e Calls that ring the user are then rerouted for example follow a forward on busy setting and then return to the user s mailbox are screened e While a call is being screened the phone can be used to either answer or ignore the screened call Auto answer options are ignored e Answering a screened call While a call is being screened it can be answered by pressing the Answer soft key On ETR phones pressing the MIC HFAI button will answer the call Pressing the call appearance or line button on which the call is indicated will also answer the call e When answered e The phone s microphone is unmuted and a normal call between the user and the caller now exists e The voicemail recording stops but that portion of the call already recorded is left as a new message in the user s mailbox e Ignoring a screened call While a call is being screened it can be ignored by pressing the Ignore soft key if displayed On 1400 and 9500 Series phones pressing the SPEAKER button will ignore the call On ETR phones pressing the SPKR button will ignore the call On M Series and T Series phones pressing the Release key will ignore
286. may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auxiliary Equipment When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Fax Machine Extension When highlighted press Select At the Extension prompt enter the extension to which the fax machine is connected Enter 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not active ie the selected extension is not a fax extension e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone i 2 3 4 5 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays Sys
287. ministration during a call only the If SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either the first intercom or call appearance button or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Calling Group and press Select 4 At the Endpoint prompt enter the calling group 18 number for the button 71 to 74 e A page call to the calling group members can be selected by adding a in front of the calling group number 5 The button function is changed to Calling Group followed by the calling group number lt e Exit programming by pressing acta PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or Ja At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter th
288. n To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 i followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the 4 and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 938 4 The button function is changed to Message Notify e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 270 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Message Alert Notification 16 25 Night Service Use this feature to program a button on the first extension on the system to turn night service on and off When night service is on all lines assigned to the telephones of the users in the night service group 18 amp ring immediately regardless of their normal line ringing settings Night service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Departm
289. n arrow buttons to scroll the display to Type Contact Close When highlighted press Select 5 At the Contact Number prompt enter 1 or 2 for the contact closure group you want to adjust 6 The contact s current operation setting is displayed 7 Press 1 to 4 to change the action of the contact closure e 1 1 Second on 2 3 Seconds on the default setting 3 5 Seconds on 4 Toggle e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 613 The phone displays Type Contact Close 4 Enter the number for contact closure 1 or 2 The display shows the current setting for that contact closure 5 Enter the value for the action required e 1 1 Second on 2 3 Seconds on the default setting 3 5 Seconds on 4 Toggle e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the
290. n Settings 10 1 Caller ID Log All Calls Caller ID is available on system display telephones and single line display telephones on all lines for which you subscribe to Caller ID service All extensions have a call log of their last 30 calls incoming answered and missed The user can access this using a programmable button set to Call Log or their phone s Call Log button if it has one In addition up to 3 extensions can be configured to have access to the call log of the last 400 calls incoming answered and missed for the whole system These fields are used to select those users Only calls that include caller ID are included The character on the phone display indicates that there are unviewed call details in the call log Use this feature to program up to three extensions that log all answered Caller ID calls and all unanswered Caller ID calls received at any extension on specific lines e To view the caller ID call log the user s extension must be programmed with a Caller ID Log 242 button with LEDs LCD this feature is not supported on a button without LEDs LCD e Transfer Return calls that are answered at the return extension are not logged even if Caller ID Log All Calls is set to active 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin Azo e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administra
291. n for the next or previous line e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 214 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 15 Holding Calls IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 215 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 15 Holding Calls 15 1 Hold Recall Time Set how long a call can be placed on hold before recalling to the extension that put it on hold if that extension is idle 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Hold Timer When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter then option required O off
292. n matching the number dialed by a user to the numbers set for different classes of call 11 Users can dial an ARS selector by dialing 8 followed by the ARS selector group number ARS selectors can also be assigned to buttons using the line assignment 754 The ARS selector groups are numbered in the range 65 to 99 Selectors 65 66 and 67 are used by default entries e 65 Group of Lines This entry cannot be deleted By default it contains all analog lines in the system however it can be edited to change the lines included 66 ISDN Standard Call This entry cannot be edited or deleted Calls routed to this entry will use an available ISDN line with the calling party information set to match the user s User CLI if set or otherwise blank to be set by the provider e 67 ISDN Number Withheld This entry cannot be edited or deleted Calls routed to this entry will use an available ISDN line with the calling party information set to withheld 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Admin2 When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to s
293. n numbering for SK3 03 02 01 Off Hook A W e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Line buttons based on the Number of Lines 73 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system are assigned from buttons 09 downwards and then button 10 upwards e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition Page 48 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview BST Phones 1 6 Dialing Codes The following features can be used by dialing the appropriate number Feature Dial Summary 6 lt Extension Answer the longest waiting call ringing at an extension Number gt Group Pickup 66 lt Pickup Group gt Answer the longest waiting call ringing any extension that is a member of the pickup group 1 to 4 selected Idle Line Pickup 8 lt Line Number gt Seize the specified line if it is idle and then make a call using that line Active Line Pickup 68 lt Line Number gt Answer or seize the call on the specified line Loudspeaker Paging Page the loudspeaker device attached to the system Simultaneous Paging 70 Page both the loudspeaker device attached to the system and the extensions in calling group 71 Group Calling Ring 7 lt Calling Group gt Call the available extensions in o
294. n the Emergency Phone Number List 105 without entering an account code e In addition to dialing the account code extension users can also enter an account code using a number stored on an auto dial button 234 system speed dial 134 or personal speed dial 13 e Automatic Line Selection 844 is not used for extensions set to forced account code entry e Do not assign forced account code entry to an external hotline 154 extension e If a System Password 114 is required to override dialing restrictions for an extension you must enter it before entering the account code 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Forced Account Code When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not assigned
295. n the system press Admin 7 e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Set Language When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed 6 7 Use the up or down arrow buttons to change the setting until the require language is displayed e The possible language options available are English French and Spanish Press Select to use the currently displayed language 8 The phone will prompt for an Immediate Reboot Press Confirm to reboot the system and use the new locale setting Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The pho
296. natively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or j a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 27 4 The button function is changed to Message Alert Notify e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 269 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extensio
297. ndicate which extensions are connected to doorphone devices and which other extensions should be alerted when the doorphone goes off hook Other Options e Music on Hold 21 A hold music source can be attached to the system 8 1 Doorphone Programming Up to 2 extensions can be specified as being doorphone extensions When a person uses one of these doorphone extensions it signals a set of doorphone alert extensions that you can specify To use the doorphone functionality program the following features e Doorphone Extension 125 Identify the extensions to which the doorphones are connected e Doorphone Alert Extensions 125 Identify which extensions should be alerted when a doorphone button is pressed IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 122 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Auxiliary Equipment Doorphone Programming 8 1 1 Doorphone Extensions Use these features to identify an extension to which a doorphone is connected A doorphone is usually placed near an entrance to screen visitors You can connect up to two doorphones to the system e The same extension cannot be assigned as an internal hotline extension 15 and a door phone extension Assigning a door phone extension as an internal hotline extension cancels the door phone setting e You should not assign the first two extensions in the system as doorphones e Switch off VMS coveragel17h for the extension a
298. ne 1 aa un BW N At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 406 The phone displays Emergency List Select a list entry 01 to 10 Enter the telephone number Press Remove to remove any current number Save the telephone number by pressing Enter Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous number entry Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 105 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 106 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Emergency Phone Number List 6 6 Outgoing Call Restriction Use this feature to specify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension e If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system the control unit may not be able to prevent calls for extensions restricted to Local Only If dialing restrictions are needed on Centrex lines use Centrex restrictions instead e Outgoing Call Restriction also
299. ne displays System Admin 3 4 5 Use the Next Process key to select Set Language Use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting e The possible language options available are English French and Spanish Press Enter to use the currently displayed language To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 69 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Use the Next Process key to select Set Language 4 Use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting e The possible language options available are English French and Spanish 5 Press Enter to use the currently displayed language e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 70 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 4 Line Settings IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 71 IP Office Basic Edit
300. ne of the calling groups 1 to 4 Group Calling Page 7 lt Calling Group gt Page the available extensions in one of the calling groups 1 to 4 Group Hunting Ring 77 lt Hunt Group gt Call the available extensions in one of the hunt groups 1 to 6 Group Hunting Voice 77 lt Hunt Group gt Page the first available extension in one of the hunt groups 1 Signal to 6 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 49 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 7 Feature Codes The following feature codes can be dialed from most phones after pressing Feature Most of these features can also be assigned to programmable buttons Feature DS Phones BST Phones Description ETR Phones Do Not Disturb 258 This function allows the user to set the extension s do not Do Not Disturb Cancel Sue h on 25 Recall 27 03 This function allows the user to send a recall or hook flash signal X N N N m me fe fo oO o N oO o gt Be ie efe This function allows the user to save the number dialed during a call and to redial that number when idle This can be used when the number dialed does not answer This function allows the user to redial the last external number dialed This function allows the user to drop a call from a conference Save Number Redial 27 Last Number Redial 05 2653 Conference Drop 250 Privacy 275 07 Call Forward 236 Call Forward Cancel 2364
301. ng a personal speed dial 13 80 to 99 as the destination e Programming the destination and or the originator onto the call coverage button is optional e Extensions configured as doorphone extension or loudspeaker device will ignore any forwarding set on the extension e Do not disturb overrides call forwarding e To access this function without a programmable button Use the following and then enter the destination number To switch forwarding off enter the extension s own number as the destination e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 11 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 4 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press 7 Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a cal
302. ng any available ISDN lines Different external number prefixes are then mapped to those ARS Selectors When a user dials an external number it is matched to a selector and uses the function and one of the lines specified by that selector Line appearances can still be used to make and answer calls on a particular line They can also be used to make a calls Dialing Restrictions In both modes the system uses a number of methods to control the numbers users are allowed to dial or not e Allowed Phone Number Lists 9 Used to specify telephone numbers that extensions associated with the list can dial regardless of other dialing restrictions e Allowed List Assignments 95 Used to assign which allowed number lists an extension can use e Disallowed Phone Number Lists 10 Used to specify telephone numbers that extensions associated with the list cannot dial e Disallowed List Assignments 105 Used to assign up to which disallowed number lists are applied to an extension e Emergency Phone Number List 105 Used to create a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all extensions can dial regardless of dialing restrictions e Outgoing Call Restriction 10 Use this feature to specify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension e Allow Remote Call Forwarding 10 All extensions can forward their incoming calls to another extension using call forwarding 236 This option is used to configure whether the ext
303. ng or press Remove to return to the default setting 8 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous list respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 104 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Disallowed List Assignment 6 5 Emergency Phone Number List The system can store a list of up to 10 emergency telephone numbers All users can dial those numbers regardless of any dialing restrictions Each telephone number can include up to 12 digits Enter the telephone number exactly as you would dial it including any toll prefixes Users at forced account code extension 167 can dial numbers on the emergency phone number list without entering an account code 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 N A a A At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scro
304. ns of calls transferred by the extension The default is the same extension Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 306 The phone displays Transfer Return Ext 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter the target extension number for transfer returns of calls transferred by the extension The default is the same extension e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 211 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0
305. ns on the system press 4 Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 730 4 If a system password 11h has been set the prompt Enter Sys Password is displayed Enter the four digit system password 5 The current remote administration password is displayed or dashes if no password has been set Enter or change the password e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cursor will move onto the next space pa irs ao 2 2abcasc e deroer 5 5jkIJKL 6 6mnoMmNOo a sa stuwuv owwyzwxyz EA ien of space E e e Do not use punctuation characters such as _ and in the password Note that the password is case sensitive and must be unique 6 To save the password press Enter The bottom line of the display shows the password as it has been entered IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 296 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance Remote Administration Password e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration P
306. ns to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 200 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings Distinctive Ringing 14 4 Line Ringing For incoming calls alerting at an extension each line appearance button can be set to ringing immediately delayed ring or no ring For the system administration extensions the first two extensions in the system you can view and change the line ringing setting of extensions From each extension you can also view the current line ringing settings of the phone but you cannot change them 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted pre
307. ns up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 42 The button function is changed to Contact Closure 2 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 255 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 18 Do Not Disturb Use this feature to be able to press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from ringing LEDs LCD still flash When Do Not Disturb is on external callers hear ringing while internal callers hear a busy signal You should use Do Not Disturb only if someone answers external calls for your extension when you do not answer them You can configure do not disturb exceptions 1eh These are numbers that are still able to call even when do not disturb is on e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Do not disturb overrides call forwarding e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 01
308. nsferred If this feature is active callers hear ringing while being transferred if it is not active callers hear silence while being transferred Once the call is alerting at the transfer destination the caller hears ringing until the call is answered or is sent to the voice messaging system e This feature is only used for held calls it is not used for parked calls 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Ringing on Transfer When highlighted press Select 5 Enter 1 or 2 e 1 e 2 Active Assigned the default Not active Not assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required gt
309. nsion you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 26 4 The button function is changed to Hot Dial e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 259 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 20 Hunt Group This function allows the user to call or page the hunt group 18 represented by the button e If an extension already has a button set to this function and target creating another button with this function to the same target will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and then dial 77 and the h
310. nt Use this feature to assign which allowed number lists 974 an extension can use 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER 4 MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Restrictions Permissions When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Disallow To When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number for which you want to assign lists 6 At the List Number prompt enter the list entry you want to change by entering 1 to 8 7 The current setting is displayed The default is 2 not active ie the extension is not associated with the selected list e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another list e Exit programming by
311. ny time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 728 4 At the Reset Save All prompt press Enter 205 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 307 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 17 9 System Shutdown Before maintenance on the phone system it should be shutdown using one of the processes below Just simply switching off power to the phone system may cause data to be lost A shutdown must always be used to switch off the system Simply removing the power cord or switching off the power input may cause errors This is not a polite shutdown any users calls and services in operation will be stopped Once shutdown the system cannot be used to make or receive any calls until restarted The shutdown process takes up to a minute to complete When shutdown the CPU LED and the IP500 base card LEDs 1 and 9 if trunk daughter card fitted will flash red rapidly The memory card LEDs are extinguished Do not remove power from the system or remove any of the memory cards until the system is in this state To restart a system when shutdown switch power to the system off and
312. o Save Number Redial e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 279 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press FEATURE 04 The button function is changed to Saved Number Redial e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 280 IP Office Basic Ed
313. o adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 210 The phone displays Assign Line to AA 4 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter the auto attendant number 1 to 9 The default is no auto attendant e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Use the Next item or Previous item buttons to select another line to adjust if required e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 78 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Line Settings Assign Line to Auto Attendant ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 210 The phone dis
314. o not affect the call System Administration The following method is used to enter system administration mode It is only supported on the first two extensions in the system 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin Centralized Administration The following method is used to enter centralized administration mode It is only supported on the first two extensions in the system a At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program Telephone Programming The following method is used to enter telephone programming mode This mode can be used on any extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or 2 or 3 e If the system has a system password set it is requested Enter the password IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 26 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview BST Phones 1 5 1 M7100 This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone f
315. o toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 7 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another line to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 203 The phone displays Co Disconnect 4 At the Line prompt enter the two digit number of the line for which you are adjusting the hold disconnect time 5 The current hold disconnect time for the line is displayed 6 Enter then option required between 1 to 7 e 01 300 msec e 03 400 msec e 05 500 msec default e 07 600 msec e 02 350 msec e 04 450 msec e 06 550 msec e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 82 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Line Settings CO Disconnect Time ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the fi
316. ocked pressing the button prompts for reentry of the four digit code to unlock the extension Station Unlock 285 This function can only be used by the first two extensions in the system This function allows the user to unlock any extension without needing to know the code that was used to lock that extension When the button is pressed the user is prompted to enter the number of the locked extension VMS Cover 287 This function allows the user to switch use of voicemail F984 F15 coverage for their extension on or off IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 222 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Button Programming Functions Function Description BST Other LED VMS Mailbox Transfer 28 This function allows the user to transfer their current call to F986 F14 an extension s mailbox After pressing the button the current call is put on hold and the user can then enter the target extension number to indicate the mailbox required Wake Up Service 29 A Wake Up Service button can be assigned for the first F 115 F 115 Yes extension on the system Using this button the extension user can set wake up calls within the next 24 hours period for any other extension IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 223 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 2 Absent Message This function allows the user to set or clear
317. ollowed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 209 The phone displays Ring Pattern 4 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter the ring pattern number 1 default to 8 e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 8 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous line e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 205 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 14 7 Override Line Ringing This option is new for IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher For extensions where this is set the extension s own ring pattern settings override any line ringing pattern 204 setting 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 5 6 7 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the
318. ompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 06 The button function is changed to Conference Drop e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 251 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 16 Contact Closure 1 This function allows the user to operate the system s contact closure 1 124 connection The user must be a member of the contact closure group 128 e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 41 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 9 41 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arro
319. on again WARNING This process will restart the phone system and disconnect all currently connected calls This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 2 3 4 5 6 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER 4 MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Dial 729 At the Shutdown Save All prompt press Proceed When the system has completely shutdown the phone display will be blank The LED 1s on the front of the phone system will fast flash red Power to the system can now be switched off M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone f 2 3 4 5 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password The phone displays System Admin Dial 729 At the Shutdown Save prompt press Enter When the system has completely shutdown the phone display will be blank The LED 1s on the front of the phone system will fast flash red
320. on is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 28 The button function is changed to Absent Message e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 225 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 3 Account Code Entry This function allows the user to enter an account code prior to making a call or during a call e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e Once a user has associated an account code with a call only that user can change the account code by entering another one e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 12 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 900 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down ar
321. on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 83 4 The button function is changed to Privacy e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 275 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the
322. on you want to edit 5 At the Line prompt enter the line number For systems running in PBX mode the number of an ARS selector 65 to 99 can also be entered The current setting is displayed 6 The current setting is displayed e 1 Assigned The line is already assigned to a button on the extension Changing the setting to not assigned will remove the line from the line appearance e 2 Not assigned The line is not assigned to a button on the extension Changing the setting to assigned will add the line to the next button after lines already assigned to buttons on the extension 7 Enter 1 or 2 If assigning a line it is automatically assigned to the next non line button after the intercom or call appearance buttons 8 To assign it to a particular button press 3 and enter the button number of press the button required This will change any current button assignment of that line e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 301 The phone displays Line Assignment At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit ui A U N At the Line prompt
323. ond digit such as 203 2129760 Prevents calls to area codes with 1 as the second digit such as 212 To prevent international calls enter the international prefix number 011 To prevent the use of all star codes enter To prevent the use of a specific star code for example 67 to block Caller ID information enter the plus the 2 or 3 digit code The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 112 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 101 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin lt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Restrictions Permissions When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Allowed Lists When highlighted press Select At the List Number prompt enter 1 to 8 for the list you want to edit At the Entr
324. one Based Administration Page 30 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 5 5 M7310 Overview BST Phones This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons N h oun o Volume Feature HD W 10 22 11 23 12 24 13 25 SK1 09 08 07 06 05 14 26 15 27 16 28 17 29 SK2 18 30 19 31 20 32 21 33 Shift SK3 04 03 02 01 Mute e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Line buttons based on the Number of Lines 7 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system are assigned from buttons 09 downwards and then button 10 upwards e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration IP Office Basic Edition Page 31 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Administration Mode Buttons The diagram below indicates the button functions during phone based administration processes
325. one number can be up to 12 digits long and may include 0 to 9 or a wildcard character to represent any digit e For specific telephone numbers enter the number exactly as you would dial it To restrict dialing numbers in an entire area code enter that area code exactly as you would dial it for example 800 or 1800 e After programming the allowed number list use Allowed List Assignment 99 to assign the list to specific extensions e Allowed number list entries override Disallowed Phone Number Lists 104 and Outgoing Call Restriction 10 gt but not a Night Service Button l18 with a System Password 11 e The entries you must make to permit or restrict long distance calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 112 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or a 1 for direct dial calls is required when users make long distance calls 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Restrictions Permissions
326. ons to scroll the display to DND Exceptions When highlighted press Select 3 The current entries are displayed Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the list of numbers e To delete the currently displayed number press Delete e To add a new number start dialing the number or press Add Dial the number and click Save e Ona 9500 Series phone to add a wildcard press the button for the highlighted row and select Dial X single digit wildcard or Dial N multiple digits wildcard e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 Press FEATURE and dial 0700 to 0719 e The number used above is not a fixed reference For example if the exception number set using 702 is cleared any numbers set as 703 and above are move to 702 and above 3 The current number is shown if any e To enter a number using the normal dialing keys
327. option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Admin2 When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Calls Out When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display the class of calls for which you want to adjust When highlighted press Select 5 You can now edit the dialing that should match the class and the ARS selectors that the class should use a To Edit the Matching Numbers Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Numbers Press Select The dialing prefixes that will match a call with the class are shown i Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the list of numbers ii To add a number click Add Enter the number and click Save iii To delete a number scroll to the number and click Delete iv When the numbers are set as required click Done b To Edit the ARS Selectors Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Targets The phone displays the list of ARS selectors currently used by the class of calls i To add an ARS selector dial the ARS selector number 65 to 99 ii To remove all the current ARS selectors press Clear iii To save any changes press Save Otherwise press Cancel e Exit programming by press
328. option is only available on the first two extensions in the system IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 19 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 4 ETR Phones ETR 34D and ETR 18D phones can be used for system and extension programming The ETR 34 ETR 18 ETR 6 and ETR 6D phones cannot be used for system and extension programming You can access administration during a call if using the phone s handset for the call rather than the speaker Once in administration all buttons presses are used for administration only and do not affect the call System Administration The following method is used to enter system administration mode It is only supported on the first two extensions in the system 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display Centralized Programming The following method is used to enter centralized administration mode It is only supported on the first two extensions in the system a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension Telephone Programming The fol
329. or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER f MUTE and HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 731 The display will show System Upgrade Press Proceed to start the upgrade The phone will display Upgrade In Progress 4 If the upgrade fails the telephone display will give the reason e Shutdown and Insert Card There is no SD card in either the Optional SD or the System SD card slot e Upgrade Failed Try Again This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the upgrade or the card has become corrupted e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested 5 If the upgrade is successful the system will be restarted lt e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature config ie
330. or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the If SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 733 The display will show Select Memory Card 4 Enter 1 for the System SD card or 2 for the Optional SD card e If the selected card is current running the option Immediate Shutdown is displayed To start the process press the Enter button otherwise press The status will change to Shutting Down and then Shut Down Check that the LED for that card slot is extinguished before removing the card e If the selected card has been shut down the option Start Up is displayed To start the process press the Enter button otherwise press The status will change to Starting Up and then Started Up e If the selected card is not present the message No Card is displayed e If the selected card is currently performing another process which should not be interrupted System Busy is displayed e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N
331. or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Pickup Group When highlighted press Select 5 At the Group prompt enter the number of the group you want to adjust 6 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number whose group membership you want to change 7 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 501 The phone displays Pickup Group 4 At the Group prompt enter a group number 5 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 6 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alterna
332. or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 409 The phone will display Forced Act Code List Select a list entry 01 to 99 un AeA WN Enter up to six digits for the list entry If the account code is five digits or less you must press Enter 204 to save the account code in memory To enter a wildcard digit press HOLD 6 Do one of the following e To enter other account codes press Next Item 205 to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 5 and 6 e To change the account code you just entered press Remove 20 gt and repeat Steps 5 and 6 e To delete the account code you just entered press Remove 20 gt 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous number entry e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 166 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Account Codes Forced Account Code List 11 2 Forced Account Code Extensions These processes allow you to set which extensions must enter an account code before making outside calls The account code can be used to charge telephone calls to a department or client e Extensions set to forced account code entry can still dial numbers o
333. ord 2 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 3 Dial 4 Press the appearance buttons in the order required e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 84 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Line Settings Automatic Line Selection ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button Centralized Programming is shown on the display At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension Dial A U N Press the appearance buttons in the order required e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 85 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 4 8 Recall Timer Duration Use this feature to change the length of the timed signal or switch hook flash generated by the system Recall feature as well as by the Recall option used in Auto Dial and Speed Dial numbers Recall sends this timed sign
334. p the disconnect time set to 500 msec the default setting The user must disconnect a held call manually by retrieving the call and then hanging it up e Shorten the disconnect time only if abandoned calls on hold do not disconnect e Lengthen the disconnect time only if calls are being disconnected prematurely e You can program and view the disconnect time for analog lines only 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Co Disconnect Time When highlighted press Select 5 At the Line prompt enter the line number The current setting is displayed 6 Enter then option required between 1 to 7 e 01 300 msec e 03 400 msec e 05 500 msec default e 07 600 msec e 02 350 msec e 04 450 msec e 06 550 msec e Alternatively use the 4 left or right arrow icons t
335. pearance buttons Administration Mode Buttons The diagram below indicates the button functions during phone based administration processes lt Process gt lt Item gt lt Data gt IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 44 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview BST Phones 1 5 14 T7316E This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system e Note that while physically very similar the programmable button numbering order for the T7316 and T7316E phones differ The T7316 is more similar to the M7310 in the order of button numbering e Additional buttons can be supported on a T7316E phone through the addition of T7316E KEM 474 button modules IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 45 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Buttons 16 downward are assigned as
336. placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 235 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 8 Call Forwarding This function allows the user to redirect all their calls to another number Extensions with Remote Call Forwarding 10 enabled can also forward calls externally by specifying a personal speed dial 13 as the destination e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e Ifthe user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e For analog lines and T1 lines without DID the extension must be the Line Coverage Extension 774 for that line e You can forward outside intercom transferred and voice signaled calls e You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions coverage calls transfer return calls and night service calls e The system will only forward calls on lines that have reliable disconnect For these lines Hold Disconnect Time 824 must be set to a value other than 00 No Detection e The extension must have an available line to forward the call to an outside number e The system uses the extension s Automatic Line Selection 84 to determine which line to use for the outgoing call e Extension s with Remote Call Forwarding 10 enabled can also forward calls externally by specifyi
337. play the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER 3 MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 734 The display will show Default Numbering and the current numbering setting 4 Use the 4 left or right arrow icons to change the setting 5 The display shows Immediate Reboot Select either Confirm or Cancel M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 734 The phone will display Def Num 4 Press 1 to select 2 digit numbering 2 to select 3 digit numbering 5 The phone displays Immediate Reboot Press either Enter to reboot the system or Release to cancel without rebooting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 734 The phone will d
338. plays Assign Line to AA 4 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter the auto attendant number 1 to 9 The default is no auto attendant e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Use the Next item or Previous item buttons to select another line to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 79 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 4 5 Group Call Distribution Use this feature to assign outside lines to Hunt Groups Doing this allows outside calls to ring directly into a Hunt Group instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist You can assign lines to Hunt Groups 1 to 6 e Each outside line can be assigned to a Hunt Group e Incoming calls hunt for an available extension in a circular manner e If a Hunt Group that has outside lines assigned receives an outside call and all members of that Hunt Group are busy or have Do Not Disturb on the caller hears ringing which continues until the call is answered e Use Hunt Group Extensions 18 to assign extensions to Hunt Groups e You should not assign T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID to Hunt Groups If a Hunt Group
339. presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 307 The phone will display Forced Account Code 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 168 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 12 Voicemail IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 169 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 12 Voicemail All IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode systems have VMS Voicemail Mail Services available by default User Voicemail Operation When a call goes to a user s VMS Cover the user s voicemail mailbox is used to take a message for the user This is used for calls dialed to the user s extension number including DID calls or incoming calls on a line where the extension is set as the line coverage extension 77 for that line e VMS Cover On Off 17 Set whether voicemail
340. pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 405 The phone displays Disallow To 4 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter the list number 1 to 8 6 Enter the required value The default is 2 not active ie the extension is not associated with the selected list e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous list respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 99 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 405 The phone d
341. pts a greeting prompt and then a menu prompt In addition that may also hear the emergency greeting first if it has been activated Auto Attendant Greeting Prompts 2 c 4 5 6 7 8 9 ra es ic es The Auto Attendant Access numbers allow internal access to an auto attendant Calls can be transferred to these numbers Morning Greeting 7811 Afternoon Greeting 7821 Evening Greeting 7831 Out of Hours Greeting 7851 Emergency Greeting 7861 Action Prompts 7841 Afternoon Menu 7871 7881 Out of Hours Menu 7891 Auto Attendant Access 7801 1 i IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 58 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Telephony Features Dial Plan 2 3 Voicemail Operation All IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode systems include voicemail as standard By default up to 2 calls can simultaneously use voicemail services By adding licenses this can be increased up to 6 simultaneous calls When Do Calls Go To a User s Mailbox If a user has voicemail enabled VMS Cover set to Enabled the default calls directed to ring at that user s extension go to the user s voicemail after having rung for the time set by the user s Voicemail Coverage Rings setting 15 seconds by default For incoming external calls this will apply if the user is set as the line s Coverage Destination e The above does not apply for calls altering just on a line appearance button that the user has ass
342. r 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group 6 e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 185 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 504 The phone displays Night Service Grp Ext 4 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 186 IP Office Basic
343. r has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Not supported on ETR6 and 1403 phones Not supported on BST phones without a display and soft keys 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press F Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Message Alert Notify and press Select e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alter
344. r or ignore the call Conference Drop 25 This function allows the user to drop a call from a F934 F06 conference IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 221 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Function Description BST Other Contact Closure 1 This function allows the user to operate the system s F9 41 contact closure 112 connection The user must be a member of the contact closure group 128 Contact Closure 2 This function allows the user to operate the system s F9 42 contact closure 2 12A connection The ae must be a member of the contact closure group h28 Do Not Disturb 258 This function allows the user to set the extension s do not disturb on or off Hot Dial 253 This function allows the user to dial a number without first F935 going off hook or pressing the SPEAKER button Automatic line selection 844 is used to select a line Hunt Group 26 me function allows the user to call or page the hunt group Intercom 1 lt Group gt 183 represented by the button Idle Line Pickup This function allows the user to seize a line if that line is Intercom 1 8 idle This allows the user to access line for which they do not have a line appearance button on their extension Last Number Redial 265 This function allows the user to redial the last external F5 F05 number dialed Loudspeaker Paging 26 This function allows the user to redial the last external Intercom 1 70 number dialed
345. r right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 401 The phone displays Call Restrict 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 To change the type of call restriction enter the required value e 1 No Restriction can make toll local and internal calls this is the default setting e 2 Internal only e 3 Local internal and local only e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 107 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 E
346. r the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 931 4 The button function is changed to Absent Message e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 224 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Absent Message ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that butt
347. r the number of rings between 0 and 6 2 is the default setting Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 176 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Voicemail VMS Hunt Delay 12 5 VMS Hunt Schedule Use this feature to determine whether the outside lines go to the voicemail auto attendant all the time only during day operation only during night operation or never You can program VMS Hunt Schedule on a per line basis When a line is set to go to the VMS auto attendant the VMS Hunt Delay 176 settings determines how long the call rings before going to the auto attendant e If you set the VMS Hunt Schedule for day only or night only you must program a Night Service button 18A for the first extension in the system 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups Wh
348. r the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter the list number 1 to 8 6 Enter the required value The default is 2 not active ie the extension is not associated with the selected list e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous list respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 103 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 405 The phone displays Disallow To Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 to 8 nan uu A U N Enter the required value The default is 2 not active ie the extension is not associated with the selected list e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setti
349. rent process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 115 The phone displays Wake Up Button The current setting is displayed If night service is already assigned to a button that button is lit 4 Enter 1 assigned or 2 Not assigned The default is 2 ie not assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 5 If active press 3 to select the button to which night service is assigned At the Button prompt press the button to which you want night service assigned or enter the button number e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones it is assigned the first button after any line appearances For BST phones is it assigned to the first button after any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 292 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 17 System Maintenance IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mo
350. ress Remove e To add other telephone numbers to this list press Next Item and repeat Steps 6 and 7 e To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and go to Step 5 e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 407 The phone displays Allowed Lists At the List Number prompt enter a list number 1 to 8 At the Entry prompt select a list entry 01 to 10 O N U N Enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory press Enter Do one of the following e To delete the telephone number you just entered press Remove e To add other telephone numbers to this list press Next Item and repeat Steps 6 and 7 e To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and go to Step 5 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 98 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Allowed Number List 6 2 Allowed List Assignme
351. rn to the default setting Alternatively use the left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 7 If assigned press Button to select the button to which night service is assigned At the Button prompt press the button to which you want night service assigned or enter the button number e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones it is assigned the first button after any line appearances For BST phones is it assigned to the first button after any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance gt e Exit programming by pressing aSa PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 187 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 503 The phone displays Night Service Button The current setting is displayed If night service is already assigned to a button that button is lit 4 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned e Alternatively use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 5 If a
352. rom another extension Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons 4 5 6 7 8 9 04 te o Feature Volume Hod IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Pagea2y IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 5 2 M7100N This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone from another extension t IT d Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o Volume 04 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 28 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 IP Office Basic Edition Overview BST Phones 1 5 3 M7208 This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone from another extension Button Numbering The diagram below indicates the button functions during normal phone operation The double digit numbers are the button numbering for programmable buttons o 05 1 2 3 04 4 5 6 03 7 8 9 02
353. row buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press P Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 12 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Account Code Entry and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Account Code Entry e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system pas
354. rphone Alert 125 Fax Machine 133 Internal Hotline 156 Line Coverage 77 Loudspeaker 132 Name 146 Extension numbering 57 66 External Call Prefix 112 External calls 54 65 External Hotline 154 F Fax Machine Extension 133 Feature Key Number 313 Finnish 69 148 Forced Account Code 164 Code List 165 Entry 167 Forwarding 109 236 French 69 148 Functions Button Programming 220 System Programming 8 G German 69 148 Group 180 Call Distribution 80 Calling 246 Calling Group 181 Contact Closure 128 Hunt 260 Hunt Group 183 Night Service 185 Pickup 189 273 H Hold Recall Time 216 Hot Dial 258 Hotline External 154 Internal 156 Hunt Delay 176 Hunt Group 183 Button 260 Hunt Schedule 213 l Idle Line Pickup 263 Immediate ring 201 Intercom buttons 54 65 Intercom Dial Tone 152 Internal calls 54 65 IP Address 313 IP Office Manager 296 Italian 69 148 K Key Mode 54 65 Korean 69 148 L Language 148 languages 69 148 Last Number Redial 265 Line Active Line Pickup 228 Idle Line Pickup 263 Line appearance buttons 54 65 Line Pickup Active 228 Idle 263 Line Ringing 201 Lines 72 Automatic Line Selection 84 Button Assignment 75 Line Coverage Extension 77 Number of Lines 73 List Account Codes 165 Allowed Numbers 97 Disallowed Numbers 101 Emergency Phone Numbers 105 Lock 283 Log Caller ID 145 Loudspeaker Extension 132 Loudspeaker Page 267 M Mailbox Transfer 289 Maintenance 308 Manager 296
355. rst two extensions on the system press Feature O0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 203 The phone displays Co Disconnect Time 4 At the Line prompt enter the two digit number of the line for which you are adjusting the hold disconnect time 5 The current hold disconnect time for the line is displayed 6 Enter then option required between 1 to 7 e 01 300 msec e 03 400 msec e 05 500 msec default e 07 600 msec e 02 350 msec e 04 450 msec e 06 550 msec e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 83 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 4 7 Automatic Line Selection When an extension goes off hook without pre selecting a button automatic line selection is used to determine which intercom call appearance or line button is seized By default each extensions automatic line selection list contains line buttons in sequence from line 1 up to the Number of Lines 734 setting plus the intercom or call appearance buttons For systems running in key system mode the number of line buttons assigned to each extension and therefore useable for automatic line selection will depend on the Number of Lines 734 settings and any additional lines assigned using L
356. s Feature 0 O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 403 The phone displays Set System Password 4 Enter a four digit password e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 111 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 6 9 Toll Call Prefix Use this feature to indicate whether users must dial a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls before the area code to make a long distance call or just the area code and number 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Restrictions Permissions When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Toll Call Prefix Wh
357. s a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 308 The phone displays Distinctive Ring 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 1 active ie use different distinctive ringing patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 199 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 308 The phone displays Distinctive Ring At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed kw N Enter 1 or 2 The default is 1 active ie use different distinctive ringing patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data butto
358. s function allows the user to answer a call being presented to any extension that is a member of the pickup group 18h configured for the button e If an extension already has a button set to this function and target creating another button with this function to the same target will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and dial 661 to 664 for the group 1 to 4 from which to pickup the call e When there are multiple calls ringing the members of a pickup group the longest ringing call is picked up 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration durin
359. s on all extensions For example entering 06 means that all extensions are assigned lines 01 through 06 For DS and ETR phones the lines are assigned to the buttons after the intercom key system mode or call appearance buttons PBX system mode For BST phones 265 the buttons used will depend on the phone model e By default the system will assign either 5 lines or if installed the number of analog trunks installed when the system is first started e You can use this procedure to limit the number of lines that are automatically assigned to all extensions For example if there are ten lines connected to the system you can use this procedure to set the number of lines to eight so that only the first eight lines are assigned to all system extensions You can then use Line Assignment to assign lines 9 and 10 to specific extensions e To change line assignments without affecting other extensions and settings use Line Assignment 754 e On systems running in key system mode Automatic Line Selection 84 for all extensions is updated to match the same set of lines in sequence followed by the intercom lines e If an extension is assigned as a doorphone extension 123 its automatic line selection is reset to select intercom buttons first e Key System Mode Only IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode systems can be installed in either key or PBX system mode This feature is only supported by systems running in key system mode The s
360. s section covers details of the feature configurable for an IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode system 2 1 Key System or PBX System For IP Office Release 7 0 the system model 654 can be changed between key system mode and PBX system mode The selected mode affects a number of controls mainly around the making of outgoing calls and the routing of incoming calls The default mode that the system adopts depends on the type of System SD card fitted to the system Systems with a PARTNER Norstar or IP Office U Law card default to key system mode Systems with an IP Office A Law card default to PBX system mode Key Mode vs PBX Mode Quick Summary PBX Mode The first 3 programmable buttons 2 on ETR phones are used as call appearance buttons The first 2 programmable buttons are used as intercom buttons Internal calls are made and answered using the intercom buttons External calls are made and answered using line appearance buttons The line used for outgoing external calls is determined by the line button pressed Automatic line selection defaults to the analog lines present and then the 2 intercom buttons Internal calls are made and answered using the call appearance buttons External calls are made and answered using the call appearance buttons The line used for outgoing external calls is determined from the number dialed Automatic line selection defaults to the 3 call appearance buttons 2 on ETR phones
361. s shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Enter the calling group 18 number for the button 71 to 74 e A page call to the calling group members can be selected by adding a in front of the calling group number 5 The button function is changed to Calling Group followed by the calling group number e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 247 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 14 Call Screening This function is used to enable or disable call screening While enabled when a caller is presented to the user s voicemail mailbox if the user s phone is idle they will hear through the phone s handsfree speaker the caller leaving the message and can select to answer or ignore the call e This feature is supported on ETR6D ETR18D ETR34D 1408 1416 9500 Series M7310 M7310N M7208 M7208N M7324 M7324N T7208 T7316 and T7316E phones e Call screening is only applied as follows e Itis only applied to calls that have audible alerted at the user s extension before going to voice
362. s useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours e If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule 213 determines when outside calls should ring voicemail The status of the Night Service Button tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode e The Night Service Button returns to the status on off it was in immediately prior to a power failure or to System Reset 307 being used e Night Service is unavailable on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Night Service Button When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed If night service is already assigned to a button that button is lit 6 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to retu
363. se phones does not depend on the system mode However the default button usage is affected by the system mode e The programmable buttons are numbered from 01 left to right bottom to top ie bottom left is button 01 top right is button 06 e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons Buttons 03 upwards are assigned as line buttons based on the Number of Lines 73 setting or the number of analog trunks installed in the system e For systems running in PBX system mode the first two buttons 01 to 02 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 25 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 5 BST Phones The term BST is used in this document to cover M Series and T Series phones supported the IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode system M Series Phones T Series Phones Other Phones e M7100 e 4100 Series M7100N e 7400 Series M7208 295 e Audio Conferencing Unit ACU M7208N M7310 314 M7310N M7324 335 M7324N The M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 and T7316E phones can be used for system and extension programming as detailed below You can access administration during a call if using the phone s handset for the call rather than the speaker or headset Once in administration all buttons presses are used for administration only and d
364. sions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Automatic Ext Privacy When highlighted press Select Enter the extension number Press either 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting Exit programming by pressing acta PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 304 The phone d
365. splay System Date 4 Enter the new system date in the format MMDDYY using the dial pad For example 120409 would be used to enter the date December 4th 2009 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 91 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 5 2 Changing the Time The time shown on every display telephone can be changed This should only be set on a system not using Network Time Synchronization 934 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Time When highlighted press Select 5 Enter the new system date in the format HHMM using the dial pad The 24 hour clock is used for example
366. ss Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Line Ringing When highlighted press Select 5 At the Button prompt enter from 03 to 99 to select the line button for which you want to view the line ringing setting Or press the corresponding line appearance button directly 6 The display will show LINE RINGING and the current ring setting for the line on that button and the line number it represents in the form lt ring setting gt L lt ine number gt e I Immediate ring D Delayed ring 5 seconds delay N No ring 7 To change the setting from its current value enter the button number again 8 To view the setting of another line button enter the number of that button e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change th
367. ssigned as a doorphone extension e To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the doorphone use Line Assignment 754 to remove all outside lines from the doorphone extension e Automatic Line Selection 844 for an extension assigned as a doorphone extension is automatically set to select intercom or call appearance buttons first 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auxiliary Equipment When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Doorphone 1 Extension or Doorphone 2 Extension When highlighted press Select 5 Enter the alert extension number Alternatively use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Clear to remove the current setting e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E
368. ssing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 303 The phone displays Display Language 4 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number that you want to set the language for The current display language is shown 5 Use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting Press Remove to return to the default for the system this will vary depending on the system locale setting 674 e The possible language options available are English French and Spanish e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 148 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Extension Settings Display Language ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Admin
369. st intercom or call appearance button 4 Enter the hunt group 18 number for the button 771 to 776 The additional number 777 can be used for access to voicemail to collect messages 5 A page call to the calling group members can be selected by adding a in front of the calling group number 5 The button function is changed to Hunt Group followed by the calling group number IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 260 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Hunt Group e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 261 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 E followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Ext
370. still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Restrictions Permissions When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Disallow To When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number for which you want to assign lists 6 At the List Number prompt enter the list entry you want to change by entering 1 to 8 7 The current setting is displayed The default is 2 not active ie the extension is not associated with the selected list e 1 Active Assigned e 2 Not Active Not Assigned the default setting e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another list e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 405 The phone displays Disallow To 4 Ente
371. sword 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 900 4 The button function is changed to Account Code Entry e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 226 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Account Code Entry ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension
372. system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code and one or more pauses if available in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system e You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and Speed Dial numbers during the course of a single call For example you can use an Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number to dial the Account Code Entry feature code and another Speed Dial number to dial the account code 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Telephone Programming When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Speed Dial When highlighted press Select 4 At the Code prompt enter 600 to 699 to select the speed dial entry to edit 5 The current setting of the speed dial entry is displayed 6 Enter the external number and press Enter Press Clear to remove any existing number The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Pause HOLD e a 1 5 second pause
373. system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 934 4 The button function is changed to Conference Drop e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 250 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Conference Drop ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension pr
374. t to start the upgrade The phone will display Upgrade In Progress 5 If the upgrade is not successful the display will indicate the probably cause e Shutdown and Insert Card There is no SD card in either the Optional SD or the System SD card slot e Upgrade Failed Try Again This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the upgrade or the card has become corrupted e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested 6 If the upgrade is successful the system restarts IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 310 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 System Maintenance System Upgrade 17 11 Memory Card Startup Shutdown Before removing either of the SD cards from the system control unit the card should be shut down This ensures that file writes to the card and other operations are completed before the card is removed Note that the System SD card should only be removed for maintenance purposes While the System SD card is shut down no voicemail is available and licensed features will only run for up to 2 hours The System SD and Optional SD LEDs on the rear of the system are extinguished when no card is present or when the card has been shutdown and can be removed e This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure
375. t Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Dial 732 The display will show System Copy Press Proceed to start the copy The phone displays Copy In Progress 4 If Proceed is not displayed or there is a problem additional text messages may be displayed e Shutdown and Insert Card There is no SD card in either the Optional SD or the System SD card slot e Copy Failed Try Again This message indicates that there was some problem For example the card in the phone system s System SD card slot was removed during the backup or the card has become corrupted e Card is Write Protected The SD card in the Optional SD card slot is write protected e System Busy Another backup restore upgrade or copy was already in progress at the time the manual process was requested gt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two
376. t a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 177 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 507 The phone displays VMS Hunt Schedule Enter the line number The current setting is shown in the telephone display n uu A U N Enter the required value e 1 Always 2 Day only 3 Night only 4 Never Default e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 8 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous line e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 178 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 13 Groups IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 179 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 13 Groups Placing extensions into groups allows users to help each other in answering calls You can set up the following groups
377. t all lines are assigned to the first auto attendant For IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher this setting allows a line to be assigned to another auto attendant e Recall Timer Duration 86 Set the length of the recall signal e Unsupervised Disconnect 874 Select unsupervised disconnection on analog trunks if supervised disconnection is not supported Other Options e Line Ringing 20 The ringing applied to a particular line appearance on an extension can be switched between immediate delayed or no ring e VMS Hunt Schedule 213 Following alerting on line appearance buttons a line can be configured to present its incoming calls to the VMS auto attendant The hunt schedule sets whether and when this option is used e VMS Hunt Delay 176 Set the delay before incoming calls are rerouted to the VMS auto attendant when scheduled to be used e Line Ringing Pattern 20 The ring pattern used for calls being presented via a particular line can be specified IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 72 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Line Settings 4 1 Number of Lines This feature should only be used during initial system configuration before any other button programming has been performed If used at any other time it will override that other button programming Use this feature to determine the number of outside lines that should be automatically assigned to button
378. t is assigned the first button after any line appearances For BST phones is it assigned to the first button after any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 188 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Groups Night Service Button 13 5 Pickup Groups When a call rings at an extension in a pickup group a user at any other extension in the system can answer that call by dialing the pickup group code or using a Pickup Group 273 button The system supports up to four Pickup Groups using group numbers 661 to 664 e You can assign each extension to any or all of the pickup groups e To pickup calls without a Pickup Group 274 button press and intercom or call appearance button and dial 661 to 664 for the group from which to pickup the call e When there are multiple calls ringing the members of a pickup group the longest ringing call is picked up 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up
379. t menus allow selection of a phantom user extension number in the same was as for normal physical extension numbers That includes using a phantom extension as the destination in an auto attendant trunk DID call map SIP call by call mapping etc e Calls to a phantom extensions are treated as follows e Calls go immediately to the phantom user s voicemail mailbox Forwarded or transferred calls go to the mailbox of the user doing the transfer or forward e If the phantom extension is included in a hunt group they are ignored e Callers can use the phantom user s mailbox DTMF breakout settings if configured to be transferred to another destination e Calls can be transferred to a phantom extension Since the calls go immediately to voicemail no transfer return is supported e Joining or bridging to a call that has been sent to a phantom extension s mailbox will drop the phantom extension from the call in the same way it does for a physical extension e Calls to a phantom extension cannot be picked up e The phantom extensions are supported within the auto attendant actions Dial by Name Dial by Number and Transfer to Number e Mailbox access for message collection and mailbox configuration is achieved by dialing 778 from any telephone then entering the phantom extension number and the mailbox access code if it has already been configured Mailboxes with a configured access code can also be accessed by external calls e Phantom ex
380. t the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the Il SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either press Intercom 1 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auto Dial Intercom and press Select 4 At the Endpoint prompt enter target extension for calls made using the button If you want to page the extension put a in front of the number 5 The button function is changed to AD I followed by the target extension number e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a syst
381. t the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial Feature 41 The button function is changed to Contact Closure 1 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 253 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 17 Contact Closure 2 This function allows the user to operate the system s contact closure 2 124 connection The user must be a member of the contact closure group 12 e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 42 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 9 42 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the displ
382. t the forwarding target rather than going to voicemail e If the extension is the target for another extension s call forwarding the call will go immediately to the forwarding extension s voicemail 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to VMS Coverage Rings When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter the number of rings required between 1 and 9 The default is 3 15 seconds e Alternatively use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another extension to adjust if required e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E
383. t two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 323 The phone displays Ring Pattern 4 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed 5 At the Pattern prompt enter a ringing pattern number 1 to 8 1 to 4 for a BST phone The default setting is 1 e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 203 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 14 6 Line Ringing Pattern This option is new for IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher It allows the ringing pattern used on a phone to be determined by the line on which the call has arrived This feature is not supported on BST phones which only use the personal ring pattern 20A setting e Calls forwarded sent to call coverage or to a hunt group will always use the line ring pattern e Incoming calls transferred to another station ring with the assigned ring pattern followed by two transfer beeps e Transfer returning outsi
384. tem Admin Dial 601 The phone displays Fax Machine At the Extension prompt enter the extension to which the fax machine is connected Enter 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not active ie the selected extension is not a fax extension e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O O followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 601 The phone displays Fax Machine Extension At the Extension prompt enter the extension to which the fax machine is connected Enter 1 assigned or 2 not assigned The default is 2 not active ie the selected extension is not a fax extension e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 133 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 7 Press the Next Item or Previous
385. tensions can be used as the line coverage extension for a line In this case the phantom extension s VMS Coverage Rings setting is used before the call goes to the phantom user s mailbox e Auto Dial Intercom buttons can be set to route calls to a phantom extension e When using system web management when selecting extensions in the various menus a phantom extension is indicated by a character The extensions Equipment Type is fixed as Phantom e The phantom extension s Automatic VMS Coverage setting can be used to disable mailbox operation If this is done calls to the phantom extension will hear busy tone The following features are specifically are not supported using phantom extensions e A phantom extension cannot be configured as any other extension type ie loudspeaker door phone fax machine or standard extension e A phantom extension cannot be configured as a night service alert extension e A phantom extension cannot be configured as a hotline extension e A phantom extension cannot be added to a hunt group pickup group or calling group e A phantom extension specified as the destination for call forwarding or follow me is ignored Instead calls will continue to alert at the forwarded user e A phantom extension specified as the destination for another extension s call coverage is ignored Instead calls will continue to alert at the covered extension IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page
386. tensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press 7 Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 22 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Station Unlock and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Station Unlock gt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature
387. ter any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 291 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 115 The phone displays Wake Up Button The current setting is displayed If night service is already assigned to a button that button is lit 4 Enter 1 assigned or 2 Not assigned The default is 2 ie not assigned e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 5 If active press 3 to select the button to which night service is assigned At the Button prompt press the button to which you want night service assigned or enter the button number e If you do not select a button it will be automatically assigned For DS and ETR phones it is assigned the first button after any line appearances For BST phones is it assigned to the first button after any intercom buttons that is not a line appearance e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a diffe
388. ter the number of rings required between 1 and 9 The default is 2 10 seconds e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 198 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings Call Coverage Rings 14 3 Distinctive Ringing Use this feature to determine whether calls should ring at a tip ring extension using the system s different distinctive ringing patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls distinctive ringing active or whether all calls should ring like outside calls distinctive ringing not active e Change the setting to Not Active if a tip ring device such as a modem or answering machine does not pick up intercom or transferred calls e If distinctive ring is set to Not Active for an extension with both a system telephone and a tip ring device the system telephone continues to use the system s distinctive ringing patterns but all calls ring at the tip ring device using a single ring burst e The system does not pass distinctive ringing patterns generated by a PBX or central office through to extensions regardl
389. tern number 1 default to 8 e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting 8 Use the up or down arrow buttons to select another line lt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 209 The phone displays Ring Pattern 4 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number 01 to 64 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Enter the ring pattern number 1 default to 8 e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous line e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 204 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings Line Ringing Pattern ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 f
390. the transfer return extension if it is not answered until the transfer originator hangs up A ring is calculated to be 5 seconds long If you program Hunt Group Extensions 18 make sure this setting is four or more rings This setting allows the call to continue hunting to other group extensions if it is not answered by the first group extension where it rings When a call is routed to an extension by transfer return it alerts with the Transfer Return ringing pattern The display indicates both the transferred caller s details and the original transfer destination If a phantom extension door extension or paging extension is set as the transfer return destination transferred calls will not follow transfer return and instead will continue ringing at the transfer destination Calls transferred by an auto attendant are not subject to transfer return When the transfer return extension has no available intercom buttons the call will continue to alert at the original transfer destination until the transfer return extension becomes available at which time the transfer return will occur This also applies for a busy analog extension or an extension in programming mode When an external call follows transfer return and there is a line appearance for the call it alerts on the line appearance If there is no line appearance the call shall alert on an intercom button When an internal call follows transfer return it alerts on an intercom button I
391. the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial 68 The button function is changed to Active Line Pickup e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 229 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 5 Auto Dial Intercom This function allows the user to make a call to another specified extension The button lamp will also indicate when that other extension is in use e This type of button can be used for one touch transfer 624 operation 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c A
392. the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the If SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Personal Speed Dial When highlighted press Select 3 At the Code prompt enter between 80 and 99 to select the speed dial entry that you want to edit 4 The current setting of the speed dial entry is displayed 5 Enter the external number and press Enter The number can be up to 28 characters in length Press Clear to remove any existing number The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Pause HOLD P _Inserts a 1 5 second pause Transfer SPEAKER R ____ Send a hook switch flash signal e On 9500 Series phones these options are accessed by pressing More and select Pause Stop or Recall as required Ao e Exit programming by pressing aSa PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or Ja At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it
393. the default setting e 2 Disallow conference calls with two outside parties e Exit programming by pressing aca PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 109 The phone displays Outside Conf Denial 4 Press either 1 or 2 e 1 Allow conference calls with multiple outside parties the default setting e 2 Disallow conference calls with two outside parties e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 109 The phone displays Outside Conf Denial 4 Press a digit to display the required value e 1 Allow conference calls with multiple outside parties the default setting e 2 Disallow conference calls with two outside parties e E
394. the extension Make sure there are no call or line restrictions assigned to an external hotline Do not use station lock at an external hotline because it will prevent the outside number from being dialed Remove external hotlines extensions from Night Service Group Extensions 18 Calling Group Extensions and 18 Hunt Group Extensions 18 Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry 16A to the external hotline 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to External Hotline When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter the external number and press Enter Press Clear to remove any existing number The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Pause HOLD Inserts a 1 5 second pause R
395. the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 15 The button function is changed to VMS Cover e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 288 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming VMS Cover 16 34 Voice Mailbox Transfer This function allows the user to transfer their current call to an extension s mailbox After pressing the button the current call is put on hold and the user can then enter the target extension number to indicate the mailbox required e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program ano
396. the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 174 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Voicemail VMS Coverage Rings 12 3 Voicemail Password Extension users can set an access code for their mailbox When they do this the access code is request when they access the mailbox If the user forgets their password you can use system administration to remove it This procedure is not listed when using the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons to select a procedure 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 2 3 4 5 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Dial 325 The display shows Reset Voice Mail Pwd At the Extension prompt enter the two digit number of the extension Press Proceed Exit pro
397. then also start ringing at the call coverage extensions Call Coverage 234 Station Lock 28 an This function allows the user to lock their extension from being used to make calls After they press the button they are prompted to enter a four digit code after which the extension is locked If the extension is already locked pressing the button prompts for reentry of the four digit code to unlock the extension Station Unlock 285 This function can only be used by the first two extensions in the system This function allows the user to unlock any extension without needing to know the code that was used to lock that extension When the button is pressed the user is prompted to enter the number of the locked extension IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 50 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Overview Feature Codes Feature DS Phones BST Phones Description ETR Phones Caller ID Log 244 2 This function allows the user to view the phone system s call log of all caller IDs of calls received by the system To use the button the user must be one of the three extensions configured for call ID logging 145 Hot Dial 258 Absent Message 22 This function allows the user to dial a number without first going off hook or pressing the SPEAKER button Automatic line selection 844 is used to select a line This function allows the user to set or clear an absent message for
398. ther extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 14 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Voice Mailbox Transfer and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Voice Mailbox Transfer e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press
399. ting incoming calls on the line to the voicemail collect requires using system web management IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 56 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Telephony Features Key System or PBX System 2 2 Dial Plan Extension Numbering IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode systems can be configured to use either a 2 digit or 3 digit numbering for user extensions e If 2 digit numbering is selected the extensions are numbered 10 to 57 This numbering cannot be changed In 2 digit mode only 48 extensions are supported e If 3 digit numbering is selected the extensions are numbered from 100 upwards This numbering can be changed in the range 100 to 579 using system web management In 3 digit mode a maximum of 100 extensions are supported e In both cases those extensions not matched by physical ports are automatically assigned as phantom extensions eth e The system numbering 6 gt mode can be changed through the phone based administration menus Special Dialed Numbers The following can be dialed after selecting an Intercom or call appearance button or simply going off hook Function Number Description Operator 0 Dials the first extension in the system Extension Pickup Answer the call alerting at another extension Dial 6 followed by the extension number Group Pickup 66 GroupDial 66 followed by the pickup group number 1 to 4 Line Pickup Answer the ca
400. tion during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Log ID All Calls Ext 1 Log ID All Calls Ext 2 or Log ID All Calls Ext 3 When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to assign to this function Alternatively use press Clear to remove the current setting gt e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press 4 Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 317 318 or 319 for the ist 2nd or 3rd extension respectively 4 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed as the logging extension e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Ne
401. tion extension gt e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button Centralized Programming is shown on the display b Program Extension is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 20 4 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 5 At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls 6 The button function is changed to Call Coverage O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then
402. tively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Do one of the following e To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 6 e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 189 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 501 The phone displays Pickup Group At the Group prompt enter a group number At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed O N U N Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 8 Do one of the following e To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 6 e To program another group press Next Pro
403. to 9 The default is 5 60 seconds O Not Active 2 20 seconds 4 45 seconds 6 90 seconds 8 150 seconds 1 10 seconds 3 30 seconds 5 60 seconds 7 120 seconds 9 180 seconds e Alternatively use the left or right P arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 127 The phone displays Hold Timer 4 Press the appropriate digit to change the value The default is 5 60 seconds 0 Not Active 2 20 seconds 4 45 seconds 6 90 seconds 8 150 seconds 1 10 seconds 3 30 seconds 5 60 seconds 7 120 seconds 9 180 seconds e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button
404. to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial the pickup group 18 number for the button 661 to 664 5 The button function is changed to Pickup Group followed by the pickup group number e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 273 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 E followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press the first inter
405. to that group hunts for the first available extension The system supports up to six hunt groups using the group numbers 771 to 776 e Any number of extensions can be assigned to each hunt group In addition extensions can be in more than one hunt group e You can include multiple fax machines or answering machines in a hunt group e Ifa ringing call to the hunt group is not answered within three rings the call moves to the next idle extension in the hunt group e If users in the hunt group leave their desks they should turn on Do Not Disturb at their extensions so that calls hunt immediately to the next available extension e Hunt Group calls are not eligible for call coverage or VMS coverage e For each external line one of the hunt groups can be selected as the line s coverage destination see Group Call Distribution 804 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Groups When highlighted press Select Use the up or down arrow buttons
406. tration Page 157 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 10 8 Outside Conference Denial Use this feature to determine if users can include more than one outside party in a conference call e This feature setting applies to all system users e If outside conference is allowed you can have up to 64 outside parties in a conference including multiple external callers but only 2 analog lines If outside conference is disallowed you can have only one outside party of any type in a conference 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Outside Conf Denial When highlighted press Select 5 The current setting is displayed 6 Press either 1 or 2 Alternatively use the 4 left or right arrow icons to toggle through the settings or Default to return to the default setting e 1 Allow conference calls with multiple outside parties
407. tration during a call only the if SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call To exit administration press the AA PHONE button IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 11 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 3 1 1403 This type of phone cannot be used for the administration functions covered by this document However using centralized administration from another phone functions can be applied to the phone from another extension The programmable buttons are numbered from 01 upwards from left to right Buttons Button Numbering 01 02 03 e For systems running in key system mode the first two programmable buttons 01 and 02 are fixed as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons e For systems running in PBX system mode the first three buttons 01 to 03 are fixed as call appearance buttons IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 12 Issue 4c 28 November 2011 IP Office Basic Edition Overview DS Phones 1 3 2 1408 This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system Programmable Buttons etc E CONFERENCE a E d TRANSFER 3 MUTE HEADSET The order of button numbering depends on the mode in which the s
408. tting of another line button enter the number of that button e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 202 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Ring Settings Line Ringing 14 5 Personal Ring Pattern Use this feature to assign a personalized ring pattern to an extension Once a personalized ring pattern is assigned to the extension all incoming calls to that extension ring with the assigned ringing pattern e The system does not pass distinctive ringing patterns generated by a PBX or central office through to extensions regardless of the setting for this feature 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the I SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Ring Pattern When highlighted press Select 5 At the
409. tton to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 126 The phone displays Auto Daylight Savings 4 Press either 1 to display Active the default setting or 2 to display Not Active e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 126 The phone displays Auto Daylight Savings 4 Press either 1 to display Active the default setting or 2 to display Not Active e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 94 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 6 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions IP Office Bas
410. ttons to scroll the display to Call Pickup and press Select 4 At the Endpoint prompt enter 6 followed by the target extension 5 The button function is changed to Call Pickup followed by the target extension number e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or J a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of the selected button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button 4 Dial 6 and then the target extension number 5 The button function is changed to Call Pickup e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous
411. ue 4c 28 November 2011 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Toll Call Prefix ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 402 The phone displays Toll Call Prefix 4 The current system setting is displayed 5 To change the setting enter the required value e 1 0 or 1 required before Area Code and Number the default setting e 2 Area Code and Number Only e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 113 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 7 PBX Mode Call Routing IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 115 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 7 PBX Mode Call Routing These settings are used for outgoing call routing on systems running in PBX system mode They are applied to calls where the user goes off hook and dials without selecting a line appearance button e ARS Selectors 11
412. uested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 603 The phone displays Internal Hotline Ext 4 Enter the extension number for which you want to change the internal hotline settings 5 At the Extension prompt enter the alerting extension number 6 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively 7 Press the Next Data or Previous Data button for the next or previous extension respectively e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 603 The phone displays Internal Hotline Ext At the Extension prompt enter the hotline extension number At the next Extension prompt enter the alerting extension number Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous extension respectively on WO A U N Press the Next Data or Previous Data button for the next or previous extension respectively e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Adminis
413. uested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 507 The phone displays VMS Hunt Schedule 4 Enter the line number 5 The current setting is shown in the telephone display 6 Enter the required value e 1 Always 2 Day only 3 Night only 4 Never Default e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 7 Press the Next Item or Previous Item button for the next or previous line e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 213 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature O 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 507 The phone displays VMS Hunt Schedule Enter the line number The current setting is shown in the telephone display n uu A U N Enter the required value e 1 Always 2 Day only 3 Night only 4 Never Default e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 8 Press the Next Item or Previous Item butto
414. unction is changed to Caller ID Inspect e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 240 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Caller ID Inspect ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the phone press Feature 00 a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Feature 00 followed by two presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 17 The button function is changed to Caller ID Inspect e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mo
415. unt group number 1 to 6 The additional number 777 can be used for access to voicemail to collect messages e A page call that is auto answered by the first available extension in the hunt group can be selected by adding a in front of the hunt group number e This type of button can be used for one touch transfer 624 operation 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or down arrow buttons to b Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program an
416. up Alarm If an automatic backup fails a backup failure alarm message appears instead of the system date and time on the first two extensions in the system After correcting the problem that caused the failure you can clear the backup failure alarm 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Parameters When highlighted press Select e Alternatively dial and the system administration 84 code 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Clear Backup Alarm When highlighted press Select 5 To clear the alarm press Proceed e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 123 The phon
417. uring a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 23 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Caller ID Log and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Caller ID Log e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password set it is requested password Enter the password b At the Extension prompt enter the extension number of the extension you want to program 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the
418. utton press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 21 The button function is changed to Station Lock e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 284 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Station Lock 16 32 Station Unlock This function can only be used by the first two extensions in the system This function allows the user to unlock any extension without needing to know the code that was used to lock that extension When the button is pressed the user is prompted to enter the number of the locked extension e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 22 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 937 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two ex
419. w buttons to scroll the display to scroll the display to Telephone Centralized Programming When highlighted press Select Programming When highlighted press Select c At the Extension prompt enter the extension that you want to configure gt e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Press the button to edit Alternatively using the up or down arrows scroll to Button Programming and press Select Enter from 03 to 99 or press the corresponding button 3 Press Program and either dial 41 or use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Contact Closure 1 and press Select 4 The button function is changed to Contact Closure 1 e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a Press A Feature and dial 1 or j a At either of the first two extensions on the system press A Feature 2 or 3 user ie Feature 8737 e If the system has a system e If the system has a system password 1
420. were handling the call being transferred e Pressing TRANSFER e Selecting the Complete soft key on the display e Calls transferred using one touch transfer are still subject to voicemail coverage or transfer return in the same way as normal transferred calls e Using this feature and trying to complete a transfer to a door phone or a loudspeaker paging extension is not allowed The transfer attempts is dropped and the original call remains on hold 2 7 Modem Access Support The first analog line port in any IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode system can be used for V32 modem access The line is switched between modem operation and normal voice call operation by dialing 9000 When operating as a modem the line cannot be used for normal voice calls For IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode 6 1 and higher the modem can also be accessed as extension 76 This can be used as the destination in an auto attendant DID or SIP trunk call map This allows remote access on lines other than the first analog line Remote access requires entry of the user name and password used for system web management as the connection name and password IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 62 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Chapter 3 System Changes IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 63 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 3 System Changes
421. wo presses the first intercom or call appearance button b Program Extension is shown on the f and one press of the second intercom or call appearance button display Centralized Programming is shown on the display b At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press the first intercom or call appearance button and dial 70 The button function is changed to Loudspeaker Page e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 268 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Loudspeaker Page 16 24 Message Alert Notification For IP Office Release 7 0 a button set to this function allows a user to see the current state of other user s message waiting lamps It can only be used in conjunction with other users for which this user has Auto Dial Intercom 23h buttons configured e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes an LEDs LCD It will indicate when the function is on e If the use
422. xit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 158 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Extension Settings Outside Conference Denial 10 9 Automatic Privacy Use this feature to prevent a user from joining an active call at an extension When automatic privacy is assigned for an extension other users cannot join active calls at that extension This feature is typically used for single line telephones and extensions connected to fax machines modems and credit card scanners which make and receive data calls that should not be interrupted This feature can provide the privacy function for single line telephones If you want to be able to intercept calls routed to an auxiliary device such as an answering machine a voice messaging system or an auto attendant make sure automatic privacy is not assigned for the auxiliary equipment extension Single line telephones and system telephones without a programmed privacy button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension If automatic privacy is assigned at an extension the LED LCD is lit automatically after programming the privacy button to indicate that privacy is currently active Automatic Extension Privacy applies only to active calls 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two exten
423. xt Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button 2 System Administration is shown on the display 3 Dial 317 318 or 319 for the ist 2nd or 3rd extension respectively 4 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed as the logging extension e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 145 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 10 2 Extension Name You can assign a name to an extension up to 15 characters long Then when that extension is used to make an intercom group or transferred call the name appears on the system display telephone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the
424. xtension 3 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 25 The button function is changed to Call Screening e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 249 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 16 15 Conference Drop This function allows the user to drop a call from a conference e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e On 1400 Series phones a list of conference parties is displayed from which the user can select which call to drop e On ETR phones the last added external party is dropped e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 06 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 934 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on whether you want to change the button programming of the extension you are using or that of another extension To program the same extension To program another extension a At the extension press Admin a At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin b Use the up or
425. xtension prompt enter the number of the extension 2 To select the button press the corresponding button For buttons up to 99 you can also dial the button number The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 22 The button function is changed to Station Unlock e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 286 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 Button Programming Station Unlock 16 33 VMS Cover This function allows the user to switch use of voicemail coverage for their extension on or off When on calls to the extension are redirected to the extension s mailbox when they ring unanswered for the extension s VMS Coverage Rings 17 setting When off calls to the extension continue to ring at the extension until answered or the caller hangs up If the feature is programmed onto a button with LEDs LCD it will indicate when the feature is active e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 15 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 984 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 Do one of the following depending on w
426. xtension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 6 e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 183 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the first two extensions on the system press Feature 0 0 followed by two presses of the first intercom or call appearance button System Administration is shown on the display Dial 505 The phone displays Hunt Group At the Group prompt enter a group number At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed O N U N Enter 1 or 2 The default is 2 Not Assigned ie the extension is not a member of the group e Alternatively use the Next Data or Previous Data buttons to change the setting or press Remove to return to the default setting 8 Do one of the following e To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number appears on the display Then repeat Step 6 e To program another group press Next Procedure 2 Prev Procedure 2 and enter a new group number Then repeat Steps 5 and 6 e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then placing it back in the cradle IP Of
427. y prompt enter the list entry you want to change by entering 01 to 10 The current setting is displayed N DO HO A Enter the new number and press Enter To enter a wildcard digit press HOLD Press Clear to remove the existing number 9 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the other numbers in the list e Exit programming by pressing ASA PHONE Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu M7324 M7324N M7310 M7310N T7316 T7316E Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press A gt Feature config ie Feature 266344 e If the system has a system password 11 set it is requested Enter the password 2 The phone displays System Admin 3 Dial 404 The phone displays Disallowed Lists 4 At the List Number prompt enter a list number 1 to 8 5 At the Entry prompt select a list entry 01 to 10 6 Enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory press Enter Do one of the following e To delete the telephone number you just entered press Remove e To add other telephone numbers to this list press Next Item and repeat Steps 6 and 7 e To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and go to Step 5 e To exit phone based administration at any time press the Release button To select a different process use the Next Procedure or Previous Procedure buttons or dial another feature code ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At either or the f
428. you are already busy on another call e Abbreviated ringing is on by default active for all extensions It can be turned on or off for specific extensions e To allow calls to ring repeatedly turn abbreviated ringing off e Abbreviated ringing is typically turned off for operators and others who handle many calls quickly e Abbreviated ringing applies to outside transferred and intercom calls e On ETR phones the volume of an abbreviated ring is lower than a normal ring e Calls to a busy extension ring at a lower volume than normal regardless of whether abbreviated ringing is on or off 1408 1416 9504 9508 Phone 1 At either of the first two extensions on the system press Admin e To do the above during a call you may need to press the ASA PHONE button to display the Admin soft key option If you access phone administration during a call only the i SPEAKER k MUTE and 9 HEADSET buttons still affect the connected call 2 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to System Administration When highlighted press Select 3 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extensions When highlighted press Select 4 Use the up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Abbreviated Ringing When highlighted press Select 5 At the Extension prompt enter the extension you want to edit 6 The current setting is displayed 7 Enter 1 or 2 The default is 1 active ie use abbreviated rin
429. ystem is running e For systems running in key system mode the programmable buttons are numbered from 01 upwards from left to right bottom to top The first two buttons are fixed as intercom buttons Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 e For systems running in PBX system mode the programmable buttons are numbered from 01 upwards from left to right top to bottom The first three buttons are fixed as call appearance buttons Key System Mode 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 PBX System Mode 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode Phone Based Administration Page 13 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 4c 28 November 2011 1 3 3 1416 This type of phone can be used for system centralized and personal administration functions covered by this document For system and centralized administration the phone must be connected to one of the first two extension ports on the system Programmable Buttons au i g B OOO u fs The order of button numbering depends on the mode in which the system is running e For systems running in key system mode the programmable buttons are numbered from 01 upwards from bottom to top The first two buttons are fixed as intercom buttons Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 e For systems running in PBX system mode the programmable buttons are numbered from 01 upwards top to bottom The first three buttons are fixed as call appearance buttons Additional buttons can be added by the addition

IP Office Basic Edition - PARTNER Mode Phone Admin

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents